FCC ID: PY312300207 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router

 

N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 User Manual 350 East Plumeria Drive San Jose, CA 95134 USA October 2012 202-11130-01 v1.0 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Support Thank you for choosing NETGEAR. After installing your device, locate the serial number on the label of your product and use it to register your product at https://my.netgear.com. You must register your product before you can use NETGEAR telephone support. NETGEAR recommends registering your product through the NETGEAR web site. For product updates and web support, visit http://support.netgear.com. Phone (US & Canada only): 1-888-NETGEAR. Phone (Other Countries): Check the list of phone numbers at http://support.netgear.com/general/contact/default.aspx. NETGEAR recommends that you use only the official NETGEAR support resources. Trademarks NETGEAR, the NETGEAR logo, and Connect with Innovation are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NETGEAR, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. Information is subject to change without notice. NETGEAR, Inc. All rights reserved. Revision History Publication Part Number Version 202-11130-01 v1.0 Publish Date October 2012 Comments First publication 2 Contents Chapter 1 Hardware Setup Unpack Your Router. 8 Position Your Router . 8 Hardware Features. 9 Front Panel . 9 Back Panel . 11 Label. 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started with NETGEAR genie Router Setup Preparation. 13 Use Standard TCP/IP Properties for DHCP . 13 Gather ISP Information. 13 Wireless Devices and Security Settings . 13 Types of Logins and Access. 13 NETGEAR genie Setup . 14 Use NETGEAR genie after Installation. 15 Upgrade Router Firmware . 15 Router Dashboard (Basic Home Screen). 16 Add Wireless Devices or Computers to Your Network. 17 Manual Method. 17 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Method . 17 Chapter 3 NETGEAR genie Basic Settings Internet Setup. 19 Internet Setup Screen Fields . 19 Attached Devices . 21 Parental Controls . 22 ReadySHARE USB Storage. 22 Basic Wireless Settings . 23 Wireless Settings Screen Fields. 24 Change WPA Security Option and Passphrase . 25 Guest Networks . 26 Guest Network Wireless Security Options . 27 3 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Chapter 4 NETGEAR genie Advanced Home Setup Wizard . 29 WPS Wizard . 30 Setup Menu . 31 WAN Setup. 32 Default DMZ Server . 33 Change the MTU Size . 33 LAN Setup . 35 LAN Setup Screen Settings . 36 Use the Router as a DHCP Server. 36 Address Reservation . 37 Quality of Service (QoS) Setup . 38 Chapter 5 USB Storage USB Drive Requirements . 44 ReadySHARE Access . 44 File-Sharing Scenarios . 44 Basic Settings. 46 Add or Edit a Network Folder . 47 USB Storage Advanced Settings . 48 Safely Remove a USB Drive . 49 Media Server Settings . 50 Specify Approved USB Devices . 50 Connect to the USB Drive from a Remote Computer. 52 Access the Routers USB Drive Remotely Using FTP . 52 Chapter 6 ReadySHARE Printer ReadySHARE Printer . 54 USB Control Center Utility . 59 Control Center Configuration . 60 USB Printer. 60 Scan with a Multi-Function Printer . 61 USB Speaker . 61 Desktop NETGEAR genie . 62 Chapter 7 Security Keyword Blocking of HTTP Traffic . 64 Block Services (Port Filtering) . 65 Schedule Blocking . 67 Security Event Email Notifications . 68 4 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Chapter 8 Administration Upgrade the Router Firmware . 70 View Router Status. 71 Router Information . 71 Internet Provider (WAN) Setup. 71 Wireless Settings (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) . 74 Guest Network (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) . 75 View Logs of Web Access or Attempted Web Access . 75 Manage the Configuration File . 77 Back Up Settings . 77 Restore Configuration Settings. 77 Erase . 78 Set Password . 79 Password Recovery . 79 Time Machine . 80 Set Up Time Machine . 80 Access the Connected USB Hard Drive . 81 Before You Back up a Large Amount of Data. 83 Change the Partition Scheme. 85 Chapter 9 Advanced Settings Advanced Wireless Settings. 87 Wireless Repeating Function (WDS) . 88 Wireless Repeating Function . 89 Set Up the Base Station . 90 Set Up a Repeater Unit. 91 Port Forwarding and Triggering . 92 Remote Computer Access Basics . 92 Port Triggering to Open Incoming Ports . 93 Port Forwarding to Permit External Host Communications . 94 How Port Forwarding Differs from Port Triggering . 95 Set Up Port Forwarding to Local Servers . 96 Add a Custom Service . 97 Editing or Deleting a Port Forwarding Entry . 98 Set Up Port Triggering . 99 Dynamic DNS . 101 Static Routes . 103 Remote Management . 105 USB Settings . 106 Universal Plug and Play . 106 IPv6 . 108 Traffic Meter . 109 5 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Quick Tips . 111 Sequence to Restart Your Network . 111 Check Ethernet Cable Connections . 111 Wireless Settings . 111 Network Settings . 111 Troubleshooting with the LEDs . 112 Power/Test LED Is Off or Blinking . 112 Power/Test LED Stays Amber . 112 LEDs Never Turn Off . 113 Internet or Ethernet Port LEDs Are Off. 113 Wireless LEDs Are Off . 113 The Push 'N' Connect (WPS) Button Blinks Amber . 113 Cannot Log In to the Router . 114 Cannot Access the Internet . 114 Troubleshooting PPPoE . 116 Troubleshooting Internet Browsing. 116 Changes Not Saved . 117 Wireless Connectivity . 117 Wireless Signal Strength . 117 Restore the Factory Settings and Password . 117 Troubleshoot Your Network Using the Ping Utility . 118 Test the LAN Path to Your Router . 118 Test the Path from Your Computer to a Remote Device . 119 Appendix A Supplemental Information Factory Settings . 120 Technical Specifications. 122 Appendix B Notification of Compliance Index 6 1. Hardware Setup Getting to know your router 1 The N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 provides you with an easy and secure way to set up a wireless home network with fast access to the Internet over a high-speed digital subscriber line (DSL). It is compatible with all major DSL Internet service providers, lets you block unsafe Internet content and applications, and protects the devices (PCs, gaming consoles, and so on) that you connect to your home network. If you have not already set up your new router using the installation guide that comes in the box, this chapter walks you through the hardware setup. Chapter 3, NETGEAR genie Basic Settings, explains how to set up your Internet connection. This chapter contains the following sections:

Unpack Your Router Position Your Router Hardware Features For information about ReadySHARE features in your product, see Chapter 5, USB Storage, and www.netgear.com/readyshare. For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the Support website at http://support.netgear.com. 7 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Unpack Your Router Open the box and remove the router, cables, and installation guide. Figure 1. Check the package contents Your box should contain the following items:

N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 AC power adapter (plug varies by region) Category 5 (Cat 5) Ethernet cable If any parts are incorrect, missing, or damaged, contact your NETGEAR dealer. Keep the carton and original packing materials, in case you need to return the product for repair. Installation guide with cabling and router setup instructions Position Your Router The router lets you access your network from virtually anywhere within the operating range of your wireless network. However, the operating distance or range of your wireless connection can vary significantly depending on the physical placement of your router. For example, the thickness and number of walls the wireless signal passes through can limit the range. For best results, place your router:

Near the center of the area where your computers and other devices operate, and preferably within line of sight to your wireless devices. So it is accessible to an AC power outlet and near Ethernet cables for wired computers. Hardware Setup 8 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 In an elevated location such as a high shelf, keeping the number of walls and ceilings between the router and your other devices to a minimum. Away from electrical devices that are potential sources of interference, such as ceiling fans, home security systems, microwaves, PCs, or the base of a cordless phone or 2.4 GHz cordless phone. Away from any large metal surfaces, such as a solid metal door or aluminum studs. Large expanses of other materials such as glass, insulated walls, fish tanks, mirrors, brick, and concrete can also affect your wireless signal. When you use multiple access points, it is better if adjacent access points use different radio frequency channels to reduce interference. The recommended channel spacing between adjacent access points is 5 channels (for example, use Channels 1 and 6, or 6 and 11). Hardware Features Before you cable your router, take a moment to become familiar with the label and the front and back panels. Pay particular attention to the LEDs on the front panel. Front Panel The router front panel has the status LEDs and icons shown in the following figure. WPS button and LED Wireless On/Off button Power Internet 2.4 wireless network 5 GHz wireless network Etherent LAN ports 14 USB port 1 USB port 2 Router stand (attached) Figure 2. Router, front view Hardware Setup 9 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Table 1. Front panel LED descriptions LED Description Power/Test Solid amber. The unit is starting up after being powered on. Solid green. The power is on, and the router is ready. Blinking amber. A firmware update is in progress. Blinking green. The firmware is corrupt. Off. Power is not supplied to the router. Internet 2.4 GHz 5 GHz Solid amber. The IP address has not been acquired. Solid green. An IP address has been received; ready to transmit data. Off. No Ethernet cable is connected between the router and the modem. Solid blue. The wireless radio is operating. Off. The wireless radio is off. Solid blue. The wireless radio is operating. Off. The wireless radio is off. LAN ports 14 Solid green. The LAN port has detected a 1,000 Mpbs link with an attached device. Solid amber. The LAN port has detected a 10/100 Mbps link with an attached device. Off. No link is detected on this port. USB

(2 LEDs) Solid. The USB device had been accepted by the router and is ready to be used. Blinking. The USB device is in use. Off. No USB device is connected, or the Safely Remove Hardware button has been clicked and it is now safe to remove the attached USB device. The WLAN and WPS buttons toggle the WLAN and WPS functions on and off. WLAN On/Off button. Pressing and holding the wireless LAN button for 2 seconds turns the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz wireless radios on and off. If the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz LEDs are lit, then the wireless radio is on. If these LEDs are off, then the wireless radios are turned off and you cannot connect wirelessly to the router. WPS button. You can use this button to use WPS to add a wireless device or computer to your wireless network. The LED below the WPS button blinks green when the router is trying to add the wireless device or computer. The LED stays solid green when wireless security is enabled in the router. Hardware Setup 10 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Back Panel The back panel has the connections shown in the following figure. USB ports LAN Ethernet ports 14 Internet port Power Reset button Power On/Off button Figure 3. Router, rear view See Factory Settings on page 120 for information about restoring factory settings. Label The label on the bottom of the router shows the WPS PIN, login information, MAC address, and serial number. Default Access Information Serial number MAC address Preset WiFi Password Preset SSID Figure 4. The label shows unique information about your router Hardware Setup 11 2. Getting Started with NETGEAR genie Connecting to the router 2 This chapter explains how to use NETGEAR genie to set up your router after you complete cabling as described in the installation guide and in the previous chapter in this book. This chapter contains the following sections:

Types of Logins and Access Router Setup Preparation NETGEAR genie Setup Use NETGEAR genie after Installation Upgrade Router Firmware Router Dashboard (Basic Home Screen) Add Wireless Devices or Computers to Your Network 12 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Router Setup Preparation You can set up your router with the NETGEAR genie automatically, or you can use the NETGEAR genie menus and screens to set up your router manually. However, before you start the setup process, you need to have your ISP information on hand and make sure the laptops, PCs, and other devices in the network have the settings described here. Use Standard TCP/IP Properties for DHCP If you set up your computer to use a static IP address, you need to change the settings so that it uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Gather ISP Information If you have DSL broadband service, you might need the following information to set up your router and to check that your Internet configuration is correct. Your Internet service provider

(ISP) should have provided you with all of the information needed to connect to the Internet. If you cannot locate this information, ask your ISP to provide it. When your Internet connection is working, you no longer need to launch the ISPs login program on your computer to access the Internet. When you start an Internet application, your router automatically logs you in. The ISP configuration information for your DSL account ISP login name and password Fixed or static IP address settings (special deployment by ISP; this is rare) Wireless Devices and Security Settings Make sure that the wireless device or computer that you are using supports WPA or WPA2 wireless security, which is the wireless security supported by the router. Types of Logins and Access There are separate types of logins that have different purposes. It is important that you understand the difference so that you know which login to use when. Router login logs you in to the router interface from NETGEAR genie. See Use NETGEAR genie after Installation on page ISP login logs you in to your Internet service. Your service provider has provided you with this login information in a letter or some other way. If you cannot find this login information, contact your service provider. 15 for details about this login. Wireless network key or password. Your router is preset with a unique wireless network name (SSID) and password for wireless access. This information is on the label located on the bottom of your router. Getting Started with NETGEAR genie 13 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 NETGEAR genie Setup NETGEAR genie runs on any device with a web browser. It is the easiest way to set up the router because it automates many of the steps and verifies that those steps have been successfully completed. It takes about 15 minutes to complete. To use NETGEAR genie to set up your router:

1. Turn the router on by pressing the On/Off button, if not done yet. 2. Make sure that your device is connected with an Ethernet cable (wired) or wirelessly (with the preset security settings listed on the bottom label) to your router. 3. Launch your Internet browser. If this is the first time you are setting up the Internet connection for your router, the browser automatically goes to http://www.routerlogin.net, and the NETGEAR genie screen displays. If you already used the NETGEAR genie, type http://www.routerlogin.net in the address field for your browser to display the NETGEAR genie screen. See Use NETGEAR genie after Installation on page 15. 4. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete NETGEAR genie setup. NETGEAR genie guides you through connecting the router to the Internet. If the browser cannot display the web page:

Make sure that the computer is connected to one of the four LAN Ethernet ports, or wirelessly to the router. Make sure that the router is fully up and running. Its wireless LED should turn on. Close and re-open the browser to make sure the browser does not cache the previous page. Browse to http://routerlogin.net. If the computer is set to a static or fixed IP address (this is uncommon), change it to obtain an IP address automatically from the router. If the router does not connect to the Internet:

1. Review your settings to be sure that you have selected the correct options and typed everything correctly. 2. Contact your ISP to verify that you have the correct configuration information. 3. Read Chapter 10, Troubleshooting. If problems persist, register your NETGEAR product and contact NETGEAR technical support. Getting Started with NETGEAR genie 14 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Use NETGEAR genie after Installation When you first set up your router, NETGEAR genie starts automatically when you launch an Internet browser on a computer that is connected to the router. You can use NETGEAR genie again if you want to view or change settings for the router. 1. Launch your browser from a computer or wireless device that is connected to the router. 2. Type http://www.routerlogin.net or http://www.routerlogin.com. A login window displays. admin

********

3. Enter admin for the router user name and password for the router password, both in lowercase letters. Note:

The router user name and password are different from the user name and password for logging in to your Internet connection. See Types of Logins and Access on page 13 for more information. Upgrade Router Firmware When you set up your router and are connected to the Internet, the router automatically checks for you to see if newer firmware is available. If it is, a message is displayed on the top of the screen. See Upgrade the Router Firmware on page upgrading firmware. Click the message when it shows up, and click Yes to upgrade the router with the latest firmware. After the upgrade, the router restarts. 70 for more information about CAUTION:

Do not try to go online, turn off the router, shut down the computer, or do anything else to the router until the router finishes restarting and the Power LED has stopped blinking for several seconds. Getting Started with NETGEAR genie 15 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Router Dashboard (Basic Home Screen) The router Basic Home screen has a dashboard that lets you see the status of your Internet connection and network at a glance. You can click any of the six sections of the dashboard to view more detailed information. The left column has the menus, and at the top there is an Advanced tab that is used to access additional menus and screens. Menus

(Click the Advanced tab to view more) Language Dashboard

(Click to view details) Help Figure 5. Router Basic Home screen with dashboard, language, and online help Home. This dashboard screen displays when you log in to the router. Internet. Set, update, and check the ISP settings of your router. Wireless. View or change the wireless settings for your router. Attached Devices. View the devices connected to your network. Parental Controls. Download and set up parental controls to prevent objectionable content from reaching your computers. ReadySHARE. If you connected a USB storage device to the router, then it is displayed here. Guest Network. Set up a guest network to allow visitors to use your routers Internet connection. Advanced tab. Set the router up for unique situations such as when remote access by IP or by domain name from the Internet is needed. See Chapter 9, Advanced Settings. Using this tab requires a solid understanding of networking concepts. Help & Support. Go to the NETGEAR support site to get information, help, and product documentation. These links work once you have an Internet connection. Getting Started with NETGEAR genie 16 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Add Wireless Devices or Computers to Your Network Choose either the manual or the WPS method to add wireless devices and other equipment to your wireless network. See Guest Networks on page 26 for instructions on how to set up a guest network. Manual Method To connect manually:

1. Open the software that manages your wireless connections on the wireless device

(laptop computer, gaming device, iPhone) that you want to connect to your router. This software scans for all wireless networks in your area. 2. Look for your network and select it. If you did not change the name of your network during the setup process, look for the default Wi-Fi network name (SSID) and select it. The default SSID is located on the product label on the bottom of the router. 3. Enter the router password and click Connect. The default router passphrase is located on the product label on the bottom of the router. 4. Repeat steps 13 to add other wireless devices. Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Method Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for easily adding computers and other devices to a home network while maintaining security. To use WPS, make sure that all wireless devices to be connected to the network are Wi-Fi certified and support WPS. During the connection process, the client gets the security settings from the router so that every device in the network has the same security settings. To use WPS to join the wireless network:

If your wireless device supports WPS (Push 'N' Connect), follow these steps:

1. Press the WPS button on the router front panel 2. Within 2 minutes, press the WPS button on your wireless device, or follow the WPS instructions that came with the device. The device is now connected to your router. 3. Repeat steps 12 to add other WPS wireless devices. Getting Started with NETGEAR genie 17 3. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings Your Internet connection and network 3 This chapter explains the features available from the NETGEAR genie Basic Home screen, shown in the following figure:

This chapter contains the following sections:

Internet Setup Attached Devices Parental Controls ReadySHARE USB Storage Basic Wireless Settings Guest Networks 18 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Internet Setup The Internet Setup screen is where you view or change ISP information. 1. From the Home screen, select Internet. The following screen displays:

Scroll to view more settings The fields that display in the Internet Setup screen depend on whether or not your Internet connection requires a login. Yes. Select the encapsulation method and enter the login name. If you want to change the login time-out, enter a new value in minutes. No. Enter the account and domain names, only if needed. 2. Enter the settings for the IP address and DNS server. The default settings usually work fine. If you have problems with your connection, check the ISP settings. 3. Click Apply to save your settings. 4. Click Test to test your Internet connection. If the NETGEAR website does not display within 1 minute, see Chapter 10, Troubleshooting. Internet Setup Screen Fields The following descriptions explain all of the possible fields in the Internet Setup screen. Note that which fields display in this screen depends on whether or not an ISP login is required. Does Your ISP Require a Login? Answer either yes or no. These fields display when no login is required:

Account Name (If required). Enter the account name provided by your ISP. This might also be called the host name. Domain Name (If required). Enter the domain name provided by your ISP. These fields display when your ISP requires a login:

Internet Service Provider Encapsulation. ISP types. The choices are PPPoE, PPTP, or L2TP. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 19 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Login. The login name provided by your ISP. This is often an email address. Password. The password that you use to log in to your ISP. Idle Timeout (In minutes). If you want to change the login timeout, enter a new value in minutes. This determines how long the router keeps the Internet connection active after there is no Internet activity from the LAN. Entering a value of 0 (zero) means never log out. Internet IP Address. Get Dynamically from ISP. Your ISP uses DHCP to assign your IP address. Your ISP automatically assigns these addresses. Use Static IP Address. Enter the IP address, IP subnet mask, and the gateway IP address that your ISP assigned. The gateway is the ISPs router to which your router will connect. Domain Name Server (DNS) Address. The DNS server is used to look up site addresses based on their names. Get Automatically from ISP. Your ISP uses DHCP to assign your DNS servers. Your ISP automatically assigns this address. Use These DNS Servers. If you know that your ISP does not automatically transmit DNS addresses to the router during login, select this option, and enter the IP address of your ISPs primary DNS server. If a secondary DNS server address is available, enter it also. Router MAC Address. The Ethernet MAC address used by the router on the Internet port. Some ISPs register the MAC address of the network interface card in your computer when your account is first opened. They will then accept traffic only from the MAC address of that computer. This feature allows your router to use your computers MAC address (this is also called cloning). Use Default Address. Use the default MAC address. Use Computer MAC Address. The router will capture and use the MAC address of the computer that you are now using. You have to use the one computer that is allowed by the ISP. Use This MAC Address. Enter the MAC address that you want to use. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 20 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Attached Devices You can view all computers or devices that are currently connected to your network here. From the Basic Home screen, select Attached Devices to display the following screen:

Wired devices are connected to the router with Ethernet cables. Wireless devices have joined the wireless network.

# (number). The order in which the device joined the network. IP Address. The IP address that the router assigned to this device when it joined the network. Note that this number can change if a device is disconnected and rejoins the network. MAC Address. The unique MAC address for each device does not change. The MAC address is typically shown on the product label. Device Name. If the device name is known, it is shown here. You can click Refresh to update this screen. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 21 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Parental Controls The first time you select Parental Controls from the Basic Home screen, you are automatically directed to the Internet, where you can learn more about Live Parental Controls or download the application. The following screen displays:

ReadySHARE USB Storage You can view information about a USB storage device that is connected to the routers USB port here. From the Basic Home screen, select ReadySHARE to display the USB Storage

(Basic Settings) screen:

NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 22 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 This screen displays the following:

Network/Device Name. The default is \\readyshare. This is the name used to access the USB device connected to the router. Available Network Folders. The folders on the USB device. Share Name. If only one device is connected, the default share name is USB_Storage. You can click the name shown, or you can type it in the address field of your web browser. If Not Shared is shown, the default share has been deleted, and no other share for the root folder exists. Click the link to change this setting. Read/Write Access. Shows the permissions and access controls on the network folder:

All no password (the default) allows all users to access the network folder. The user name (account name) for All no password is guest. The password for admin is the same one that you use to log in to the router. By default, it is password. Folder Name. Full path used by the network folder. Volume Name. Volume name from the storage device (either USB drive or HDD). Total/Free Space. Shows the current utilization of the storage device. Edit. Click the Edit button to edit the Available Network Folders settings. Safely Remove a USB Device. Click to safely remove the USB device attached to your router. You can click Refresh to update this screen. For more information about USB storage, see Chapter 5, USB Storage. Basic Wireless Settings The Wireless Settings screen lets you view or configure the wireless network setup. The N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router comes with preset security. This means that the Wi-Fi network name (SSID), network key (password), and security option (encryption protocol) are preset in the factory. You can find the preset SSID and password on the bottom of the unit. Note: The preset SSID and password are uniquely generated for every device to protect and maximize your wireless security. To view or change basic wireless settings:

NETGEAR recommends that you do not change your preset security settings. If you do decide to change your preset security settings, make a note of the new settings and store it in a safe place where you can easily find it. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 23 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 If you use a wireless computer to change the wireless network name (SSID) or other wireless security settings, you are disconnected when you click Apply. To avoid this problem, use a computer with a wired connection to access the router. 1. On the Basic Home screen, select Wireless to display the Wireless Settings screen. You can scroll down to view the 5 GHz wireless network settings. The screen sections, settings, and procedures are explained in the following sections. 2. Make any changes that are needed, and click Apply to save your settings. 3. Set up and test your wireless devices and computers to make sure that they can connect wirelessly. If they do not, check the following:

Is your wireless device or computer connected to your network or another wireless network in your area? Some wireless devices automatically connect to the first open network (without wireless security) that they discover. Does your wireless device or computer show up on the Attached Devices screen? If it does, then it is connected to the network. If you are not sure what the network name (SSID) or password is, look on the label on the bottom of your router. Wireless Settings Screen Fields Region Selection The location where the router is used. Select from the countries in the list. Note that in the United States, the region is fixed to United States and is not changeable. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 24 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Wireless Network 2.4 GHz b/g/n and 5.0 GHz a/n The b/g/n and a/n notation references the 802.11 standards of conformance. For instance, the 2.4 b/g/n conforms to 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n at 2.4 GHz radio frequency. Enable Wireless Isolation. If this check box is selected, then wireless clients (computers or wireless devices) that join the network can use the Internet, but cannot access each other or access Ethernet devices on the network. Enable SSID Broadcast. This setting allows the router to broadcast its SSID so wireless stations can see this wireless name (SSID) in their scanned network lists. This check box is selected by default. To turn off the SSID broadcast, clear the Allow Broadcast of Name

(SSID) check box, and click Apply. Name (SSID). The SSID is also known as the wireless network name. Enter a 32-character

(maximum) name in this field. This field is case-sensitive. The default SSID is randomly generated, and NETGEAR strongly recommends that you do not change this. Channel. This setting is the wireless channel used by the gateway. Enter a value from 1 through 13. (For products in the North America market, only Channels 1 through 11 can be operated.) Do not change the channel unless you experience interference (shown by lost connections or slow data transfers). If this happens, experiment with different channels to see which is the best. Mode. Up to 217 Mbps is the default and allows 802.11n and 802.11g wireless devices to join the network. g & b supports up to 54 Mbps. The 450 Mbps setting allows 802.11n devices to connect at this speed. Security Options Settings The Security Options section of the Wireless Settings screen lets you change the security option and passphrase. Please note that NETGEAR recommends that you not change the security option or passphrase, but if you want to change these settings, this section explains how. Do not disable security. Change WPA Security Option and Passphrase 1. Under Security Options, select the WPA option you want. 2. In the Passphrase field that displays when you select a WPA security option, enter the network key (passphrase) that you want to use. It is a text string from 8 to 63 characters. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 25 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Guest Networks Adding a guest network allows visitors at your home to use the Internet without giving them your wireless security key. You can add a guest network to each wireless network: 2.4 GHz b/g/n and 5.0 GHz a/n. To set up a guest network:

1. Select Basic > Guest Network to display the following screen:

2. For a 5 GHz network, scroll down to view that section of the Guest Network screen. 3. Select any of the following wireless settings:

Enable Guest Network. When this check box is selected, the guest network is enabled, and guests can connect to your network using the SSID of this profile. Enable Wireless Isolation. If this check box is selected, then wireless clients (computers or wireless devices) that join the network can use the Internet, but cannot access each other or access Ethernet devices on the network. Enable SSID Broadcast. If this check box is selected, the wireless access point broadcasts its name (SSID) to all wireless stations. Stations with no SSID can adopt the correct SSID for connections to this access point. Allow guest to access My Local Network. If this check box is selected, any user who connects to this SSID has access to your local network, not just Internet access. 4. Give the guest network a name. The guest network name is case-sensitive and can be up to 32 characters. You then manually configure the wireless devices in your network to use the guest network name in addition to the main nonguest SSID. 5. Select a security option from the list. The security options are described in Guest Network Wireless Security Options on page 6. Click Apply to save your selections. 27. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 26 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Guest Network Wireless Security Options A security option is the type of security protocol applied to your wireless network. The security protocol in force encrypts data transmissions and ensures that only trusted devices receive authorization to connect to your network. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) has several options including pre-shared key (PSK) encryption. This section presents an overview of the security options and provides guidance on when to use which option. Note that it is also possible to set up a guest network without wireless security. NETGEAR does not recommend this. WPA Encryption WPA encryption is built into all hardware that has the Wi-Fi-certified seal. This seal means the product is authorized by the Wi-Fi Alliance (http://www.wi-fi.org/) because it complies with the worldwide single standard for high-speed wireless local area networking. WPA uses a passphrase to perform authentication and generate the initial data encryption keys. Then it dynamically varies the encryption key. WPA-PSK uses Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) data encryption, implements most of the IEEE 802.11i standard, and is designed to work with all wireless network interface cards, but not all wireless access points. It is superseded by WPA2-PSK. WPA2-PSK is stronger than WPA-PSK. It is advertised to be theoretically indecipherable due to the greater degree of randomness in encryption keys that it generates. WPA2-PSK gets higher speed because it is usually implemented through hardware, while WPA-PSK is usually implemented through software. WPA2-PSK uses a passphrase to authenticate and generate the initial data encryption keys. Then it dynamically varies the encryption key. WPS-PSK + WPA2-PSK Mixed Mode can provide broader support for all wireless clients. WPA2-PSK clients get higher speed and security, and WPA-PSK clients get decent speed and security. The product documentation for your wireless adapter and WPA client software should have instructions about configuring their WPA settings. NETGEAR genie Basic Settings 27 4. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home Specifying custom settings 4 This chapter explains the features available from the NETGEAR genie Advanced Home screen, shown in the following figure:

This screen is also displayed through the Administration menu. This chapter contains the following sections:

Setup Wizard WPS Wizard Setup Menu WAN Setup LAN Setup Quality of Service (QoS) Setup Some selections on the Advanced Home screen are described in separate chapters:

USB Storage. See Chapter 5, USB Storage. Security. See Chapter 7, Security. Administration. See Chapter 8, Administration. Advanced Setup. See Chapter 9, Advanced Settings. 28 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Setup Wizard The NETGEAR genie installation process is launched the first time you set up the router. After setting up the router the first time, if you want to perform this task again, you can run Setup Wizard from the Advanced tab of the NETGEAR genie. 1. Select Setup Wizard to display the following screen:

2. Select either Yes or No, I want to configure the router myself. If you select No, you are taken to the Internet Setup screen (see Internet Setup on page If you selected Yes, click Next. The following screen displays:

3. 19). The Setup Wizard searches your Internet connection for servers and protocols to determine your ISP configuration. The following screen displays:

NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 29 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 WPS Wizard The WPS Wizard helps you add a WPS-capable client device (a wireless device or computer) to your network. On the client device you need to either press its WPS button or locate its WPS PIN. To use the WPS Wizard:

1. Select Advanced > WPS Wizard. 2. Click Next. The following screen lets you select the method for adding the WPS client (a wireless device or computer). You can use either the push button or PIN method. 3. Select either Push Button or PIN Number. To use the push button method, either click the WPS button on this screen, or press the WPS button located on the side of the router. Within 2 minutes, go to the wireless client and press its WPS button to join the network without entering a password. To use the PIN method, select the PIN Number radio button, enter the client security PIN, and click Next. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 30 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Within 2 minutes, go to the client device and use its WPS software to join the network without entering a password. The router attempts to add the WPS-capable device. The WPS LED on the front of the router blinks green. When the router establishes a WPS connection, the LED is solid green, and the router WPS screen displays a confirmation message. 4. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to add another WPS client to your network. Setup Menu Select Advanced > Setup to display the Setup menu. The following selections are available:

Internet Setup. This is a shortcut to the same Internet Setup screen that you can access from the dashboard on the Basic Home screen. See Internet Setup on page 19. Wireless Setup. This is a shortcut to the same Wireless Settings screen that you can access from the dashboard on the Basic Home screen. See Basic Wireless Settings on page 23. Guest Network. This is a shortcut to the same Guest Network screen that you can access from the dashboard on the Basic Home screen. See Guest Networks on page 26. WAN Setup. Internet (WAN) setup. See WAN Setup on page QoS Setup.Quality of Service (QoS) setup. See Quality of Service (QoS) Setup on LAN Setup. Local area network (LAN) setup. See LAN Setup on page 32. 35. page 38. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 31 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 WAN Setup The WAN Setup screen lets you configure a DMZ (demilitarized zone) server, change the Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU) size, and enable the router to respond to a ping on the WAN

(Internet) port. Select Advanced > Setup > WAN Setup to view the following screen:

Disable Port Scan and DoS Protection. DoS protection protects your LAN against denial of service attacks such as Syn flood, Smurf Attack, Ping of Death, Teardrop Attack, UDP Flood, ARP Attack, Spoofing ICMP, Null Scan, and many others. This should be disabled only in special circumstances. Default DMZ Server. This feature is sometimes helpful when you are playing online games or videoconferencing. Be careful when using this feature because it makes the firewall security less effective. See the following section, Default DMZ Server, for more details. Respond to Ping on Internet Port. If you want the router to respond to a ping from the Internet, select this check box. Use this only as a diagnostic tool because it allows your router to be discovered. Do not select this check box unless you have a specific reason. Disable IGMP Proxying. IGMP proxying allows a computer on the local area network

(LAN) to receive the multicast traffic it is interested in from the Internet. You can select this check box to disable the feature if you do not need it. MTU Size (in bytes). The normal MTU (Maximum Transmit Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 bytes, or 1492 bytes for PPPoE connections. For some ISPs you might need to reduce the MTU. This is rarely required, and should not be done unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP connection. See Change the MTU Size on page 33. NAT Filtering. Network Address Translation (NAT) determines how the router processes inbound traffic. Secured NAT provides a secured firewall to protect the computers on the LAN from attacks from the Internet, but might prevent some Internet games, point-to-point applications, or multimedia applications from functioning. Open NAT provides a much less secured firewall, but allows almost all Internet applications to function. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 32 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Default DMZ Server The default DMZ server feature is helpful when you are using some online games and videoconferencing applications that are incompatible with Network Address Translation

(NAT). The router is programmed to recognize some of these applications and to work correctly with them, but there are other applications that might not function well. In some cases, one local computer can run the application correctly if that computers IP address is entered as the default DMZ server. WARNING:

DMZ servers pose a security risk. A computer designated as the default DMZ server loses much of the protection of the firewall and is exposed to exploits from the Internet. If compromised, the DMZ server computer can be used to attack other computers on your network. Incoming traffic from the Internet is usually discarded by the router unless the traffic is a response to one of your local computers or a service that you have configured in the Port Forwarding/Port Triggering screen. Instead of discarding this traffic, you can have it forwarded to one computer on your network. This computer is called the default DMZ server. To set up a default DMZ server:

1. On the WAN Setup screen, select the Default DMZ Server check box. 2. Type the IP address. 3. Click Apply. Change the MTU Size The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is the largest data packet a network device transmits. When one network device communicates across the Internet with another, the data packets travel through many devices along the way. If any device in the data path has a lower MTU setting than the other devices, the data packets have to be split or fragmented to accommodate the device with the smallest MTU. The best MTU setting for NETGEAR equipment is often just the default value, and changing the value might fix one problem but cause another. Leave MTU unchanged unless one of these situations occurs:

You have problems connecting to your ISP or other Internet service, and the technical support of either the ISP or NETGEAR recommends changing the MTU setting. These web-based applications might require an MTU change:

- A secure website that will not open, or displays only part of a web page

- Yahoo email

- MSN portal

- America Onlines DSL service NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 33 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 You use VPN and have severe performance problems. You used a program to optimize MTU for performance reasons, and now you have connectivity or performance problems. Note: An incorrect MTU setting can cause Internet communication problems such as the inability to access certain websites, frames within websites, secure login pages, or FTP or POP servers. If you suspect an MTU problem, a common solution is to change the MTU to 1400. If you are willing to experiment, you can gradually reduce the MTU from the maximum value of 1500 until the problem goes away. The following table describes common MTU sizes and applications. Table 2. Common MTU Sizes MTU 1500 1492 1472 1468 1460 1436 1400 576 Application The largest Ethernet packet size and the default value. This is the typical setting for non-PPPoE, non-VPN connections, and is the default value for NETGEAR routers, adapters, and switches. Used in PPPoE environments. Maximum size to use for pinging. (Larger packets are fragmented.) Used in some DHCP environments. Usable by AOL if you do not have large email attachments, for example. Used in PPTP environments or with VPN. Maximum size for AOL DSL. Typical value to connect to dial-up ISPs. To change the MTU size:

1. Select Advanced > Setup > WAN Setup. 2. 3. Click Apply to save the settings. In the MTU Size field, enter a new size between 64 and 1500. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 34 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 LAN Setup The LAN Setup screen allows configuration of LAN IP services such as Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Routing Information Protocol (RIP). The router is shipped preconfigured to use private IP addresses on the LAN side and to act as a DHCP server. The routers default LAN IP configuration is:

LAN IP address. 192.168.1.1 Subnet mask. 255.255.255.0 These addresses are part of the designated private address range for use in private networks and should be suitable for most applications. If your network has a requirement to use a different IP addressing scheme, you can make those changes in the LAN Setup screen. To change the LAN settings:

Note: If you change the LAN IP address of the router while connected through the browser, you will be disconnected. You will have to open a new connection to the new IP address and log in again. 1. Select Advanced > Setup > LAN Setup to display the following screen:

2. Enter the settings that you want to customize. These settings are described in the following section, LAN Setup Screen Settings. 3. Click Apply to save your changes. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 35 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 LAN Setup Screen Settings LAN TCP/IP Setup IP Address. The LAN IP address of the router. IP Subnet Mask. The LAN subnet mask of the router. Combined with the IP address, the IP subnet mask allows a device to know which other addresses are local to it, and which have to be reached through a gateway or router. RIP Direction. Router Information Protocol (RIP) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. This setting controls how the router sends and receives RIP packets. Both is the default setting. With the Both or Out Only setting, the router broadcasts its routing table periodically. With the Both or In Only setting, the router incorporates the RIP information that it receives. RIP Version. This controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the router sends. It recognizes both formats when receiving. By default, the RIP function is disabled. RIP-1 is universally supported. It is adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network setup. RIP-2 carries more information. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M send the routing data in RIP-2 format. RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting. RIP-2M uses multicasting. Use Router as a DHCP Server This check box is usually selected so that the router functions as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. Starting IP Address. Specify the start of the range for the pool of IP addresses in the same subnet as the router. Ending IP Address. Specify the end of the range for the pool of IP addresses in the same subnet as the router. Address Reservation When you specify a reserved IP address for a computer on the LAN, that computer receives the same IP address each time it accesses the routers DHCP server. Assign reserved IP addresses to servers that require permanent IP settings. Use the Router as a DHCP Server By default, the router functions as a DHCP server, allowing it to assign IP, DNS server, and default gateway addresses to all computers connected to the routers LAN. The assigned default gateway address is the LAN address of the router. The router assigns IP addresses to the attached computers from a pool of addresses specified in this screen. Each pool address is tested before it is assigned to avoid duplicate addresses on the LAN. For most applications, the default DHCP and TCP/IP settings of the router are satisfactory. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 36 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 You can specify the pool of IP addresses to be assigned by setting the starting IP address and ending IP address. These addresses should be part of the same IP address subnet as the routers LAN IP address. Using the default addressing scheme, you should define a range between 192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.254, although you might want to save part of the range for devices with fixed addresses. The router delivers the following parameters to any LAN device that requests DHCP:

An IP address from the range you have defined Subnet mask Gateway IP address (the routers LAN IP address) Primary DNS server (if you entered a primary DNS address in the Internet Setup screen;

otherwise, the routers LAN IP address) Secondary DNS server (if you entered a secondary DNS address in the Internet Setup screen) To use another device on your network as the DHCP server, or to manually configure the network settings of all of your computers, clear the Use Router as DHCP Server check box and click Apply. Otherwise, leave this check box selected. If this service is not enabled and no other DHCP server is available on your network, you need to set your computers IP addresses manually or they will not be able to access the router. Address Reservation When you specify a reserved IP address for a computer on the LAN, that computer always receives the same IP address each time it accesses the routers DHCP server. Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to computers or servers that require permanent IP settings. To reserve an IP address:

1. 2. In the Address Reservation section of the screen, click the Add button. In the IP Address field, type the IP address to assign to the computer or server. (Choose an IP address from the routers LAN subnet, such as 192.168.1.x.) 3. Type the MAC address of the computer or server. Tip: If the computer is already on your network, you can copy its MAC address from the Attached Devices screen and paste it here. 4. Click Apply to enter the reserved address into the table. The reserved address is not assigned until the next time the computer contacts the routers DHCP server. Reboot the computer, or access its IP configuration and force a DHCP release and renew. To edit or delete a reserved address entry, select the radio button next to the reserved address you want to edit or delete. Then click Edit or Delete. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 37 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Quality of Service (QoS) Setup QoS is an advanced feature that can be used to prioritize some types of traffic ahead of others. The N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router can provide QoS prioritization over the wireless link and on the Internet connection. To configure QoS, use the QoS Setup screen. Select Advanced > Setup > QoS Setup to display the following screen:

Enable WMM QoS for Wireless Multimedia Applications The N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router supports Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service

(WMM QoS) to prioritize wireless voice and video traffic over the wireless link. WMM QoS provides prioritization of wireless data packets from different applications based on four access categories: voice, video, best effort, and background. For an application to receive the benefits of WMM QoS, both it and the client running that application have to have WMM enabled. Legacy applications that do not support WMM and applications that do not require QoS, are assigned to the best effort category, which receives a lower priority than voice and video. WMM QoS is enabled by default. You can disable it in the QoS Setup screen by clearing the Enable WMM check box and clicking Apply. Set Up QoS for Internet Access You can give prioritized Internet access to the following types of traffic:

Specific applications Specific online games A specific device by MAC address Individual Ethernet LAN ports of the router NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 38 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To specify prioritization of traffic, you have to create a policy for the type of traffic and add the policy to the QoS Policy table in the QoS Setup screen. For convenience, the QoS Policy table lists many common applications and online games that can benefit from QoS handling. QoS for Applications and Online Gaming To create a QoS policy for applications and online games:

In the QoS Setup screen, select the Turn Internet Access QoS On check box. 1. 2. Click the Setup QoS Rule button to see the existing priority rules. On this screen you can edit or delete a rule by selecting its radio button and clicking either the Edit or Delete button. You can also delete all of the rules by simply clicking the Delete All button. 3. To add a priority rule, scroll down to the bottom of the QoS Setup screen and click Add Priority Rule to display the following screen:

4. In the QoS Policy for field, type the name of the application or game. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 39 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 5. In the Priority Category list, select either Applications or Online Gaming. In either case, a list of applications or games displays in the list. 6. You can select an existing item from the list, or you can scroll and select Add a New Application or Add a New Game, as applicable. a. If you add a new entry, the Priority Rules screen expands as shown:

b. c. In the QoS Policy for field, enter a descriptive name for the new application or game. In the Connection Type list, select either TCP, UDP, or both (TCP/UDP), and specify the port number or range of port numbers used by the application or game. 7. From the Priority list, select the priority that this traffic should receive relative to other applications and traffic when accessing the Internet. The options are Low, Normal, High, and Highest. 8. Click Apply to save this rule to the QoS Policy list and return to the QoS Setup screen. QoS for a Router LAN Port To create a QoS policy for a device connected to one of the routers LAN ports:

1. Select Advanced > Setup > QoS Setup to display the QoS Setup screen. Select the Turn Internet Access QoS On check box. 2. Click the Setup QoS Rule button. 3. Click the Add Priority Rule button. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 40 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 4. From the Priority Category list, select Ethernet LAN Port, as shown in the following figure:

5. From the LAN port list, select the LAN port that will have a QoS policy. 6. From the Priority list, select the priority that this ports traffic should receive relative to other applications and traffic when accessing the Internet. The options are Low, Normal, High, and Highest. 7. Click Apply to save this rule to the QoS Policy list and return to the QoS Setup screen. 8. In the QoS Setup screen, click Apply. QoS for a MAC Address To create a QoS policy for traffic from a specific MAC address:

1. Select Advanced > Setup > QoS Setup, and click the Setup QoS Rule button. The QoS Setup screen displays. 2. Click Add Priority Rule. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 41 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 3. From the Priority Category list, select MAC Address to display the following screen:

4. If the device to be prioritized appears in the MAC Device List, select its radio button. The information from the MAC Device List populates the policy name, MAC Address, and Device Name fields. If the device does not appear in the MAC Device List, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, you have to complete these fields manually. 5. From the Priority list, select the priority that this devices traffic should receive relative to other applications and traffic when accessing the Internet. The options are Low, Normal, High, and Highest. 6. Click Apply to save this rule to the QoS Policy list and return to the QoS Setup screen. 7. 8. Click Apply. In the QoS Setup screen, select the Turn Internet Access QoS On check box. Editing or Deleting an Existing QoS Policy To edit or delete a QoS policy:

1. Select Advanced > QoS Setup to display the QoS Setup screen. 2. Select the radio button next to the QoS policy to be edited or deleted, and do one of the following:

Click Delete to remove the QoS policy. Click Edit to edit the QoS policy. Follow the instructions in the preceding sections to change the policy settings. 3. Click Apply in the QoS Setup screen to save your changes. NETGEAR genie Advanced Home 42 5. USB Storage Accessing and configuring a USB storage drive 5 This chapter describes how to access and configure a USB storage drive attached to your router. Be aware that the USB port on the router can be used only to connect USB storage devices like flash drives or hard drives, or a printer. Do not connect computers, USB modems, CD drives, or DVD drives to the router USB port. This chapter contains the following sections:

USB Drive Requirements ReadySHARE Access File-Sharing Scenarios Basic Settings USB Storage Advanced Settings Safely Remove a USB Drive Media Server Settings Specify Approved USB Devices For information about using the ReadySHARE Printer feature, see Chapter 6, ReadySHARE Printer. For additional about ReadySHARE features, see www.netgear.com/readyshare. 43 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 USB Drive Requirements The router works with 1.0 and 1.1 (USB Full Speed) and 2.0 (USB High Speed) standards. The approximate USB bus speeds are shown in the following table. Actual bus speeds can vary, depending on the CPU speed, memory, speed of the network, and other variables. Table 3. USB Drive Speeds Bus USB 1.1 USB 2.0 Speed/Sec 12 Mbits 480 Mbits The router should work with most USB-compliant external flash and hard drives. For the most up-to-date list of USB drives supported by the router, go to:

http://kbserver.netgear.com/readyshare The router supports both read and write for FAT16, FAT32, NTFS, and Linux file systems

(EXT2 and EXT3). Note: Some USB external hard drives and flash drives require drivers to be loaded in to the PC before the PC can access the USB device. Such USB devices do not work with the router. ReadySHARE Access Once you have set up your router, you can connect any USB storage device and share the contents with other users on your network. You can access your USB device in any of the following ways:

On Windows 7, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 2000 systems, select Start >

Run, and enter \\readyshare in the dialog box. Click OK. On Windows 7, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 2000 systems, open Internet Explorer or Safari, and enter \\readyshare in the address bar. On Mac OS X (version 10.2 or later), enter smb://readyshare in the address bar. In My Network Places, enter \\readyshare in the address bar. File-Sharing Scenarios You can share files on the USB drive for a wide variety of business and recreational purposes. The files can be any PC, Mac, or Linux file type including text files, Word, PowerPoint, Excel, MP3, pictures, and multimedia. USB drive applications include:

USB Storage 44 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Sharing multimedia with friends and family such as MP3 files, pictures, and other multimedia with local and remote users. Sharing resources on your network. You might want to store files in a central location so that you do not have to power up a computer to perform local sharing. In addition, you can share files between Macintosh, Linux, and PC computers by using the USB drive as a go-between across the systems. Sharing files such as Word documents, PowerPoint presentations, and text files with remote users. A few common uses are described in the following sections. Sharing Photos You can create your own central storage location for photos and multimedia. This eliminates the need to log in to (and pay for) an external photo-sharing site. To share files with your friends and family:

1. 2. Insert your USB drive into the USB port on the router either directly or with a USB cable. Computers on your local area network (LAN) can automatically access this USB drive using a web browser or Microsoft Networking. If you want to specify read-only access or to allow access from the Internet, see USB Storage Advanced Settings on page 48. Storing Files in a Central Location for Printing This scenario is for a family that has one high-quality color printer directly attached to a computer, but not shared on the local area network (LAN). This family does not have a print server. One family member has photos on a Macintosh computer that she wants to print. The photo-capable color printer is directly attached to a PC, but not shared on the network. The Mac and PC are not visible to each other on the network. To print photos from a Mac on the printer attached to a PC:

1. On the Mac, access the USB drive by typing \\readyshare in the address field of a web browser. Then copy the photos to the USB drive. 2. On the PC, use a web browser or Microsoft Networking to copy the files from the USB drive to the PC. Then print the files. Sharing Large Files over the Internet Sending files that are larger than 5 MB can pose a problem for many email systems. The router allows you to share very large files such as PowerPoint presentations or .zip files over the Internet. FTP can be used to easily download shared files from the router. Sharing files with a remote colleague involves the following considerations:

USB Storage 45 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 There are two user accounts: admin and guest. The password for admin is the same one that you use to access the router. By default, it is password. The guest user account has no password. On the FTP site, the person receiving the files should use the guest user account and enter any password (FTP requires that you type something in the password field). Be sure to select the FTP (via Internet) check box in the USB Storage Advanced Settings screen. This option supports both downloading and uploading of files. Note: You can enable the HTTP (via Internet) option on the Advanced USB Storage screen to share large files. This option supports downloading files only. Basic Settings You can view or edit basic settings for the USB storage device attached to your router. You can access this feature by selecting Basic > ReadySHARE, or Advanced > USB Storage > ReadySHARE. The USB Storage (Basic Settings) screen displays:

By default, the USB storage device is available to all computers on your local area network

(LAN). The ReadySHARE print feature allows you to share a printer that you connect to the USB port on your router. To use the ReadySHARE print feature on a Windows PC, you need to use the NETGEAR USB Control Center utility. For information about this feature, see Chapter 6, ReadySHARE Printer. USB Storage 46 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To access your USB device:

1. Click the network device name or the share name in your computers network folders list. 2. For SMB://readyshare, click Connect. Note: If you logged in to the router before you connected your USB device, you might not see your USB device in the router screens until you log out and then log back in again. Add or Edit a Network Folder 1. You can access this feature by selecting Basic > ReadySHARE, and clicking Edit, or selecting Advanced > USB Storage > Advanced Settings. 2. Specify the changes that you want to make:

To add a folder, click Create Network Folder. USB Storage 47 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To edit a folder, select its radio button, and then click Edit. 3. You can use this screen to select a folder, to change the share name, or to change the read Access or write access from All no password to admin. The user name (account name) for All no password is guest. The password for admin is the same one that is used to log in to the router. By default, it is password. 4. Click Apply for your changes to take effect. USB Storage Advanced Settings You can set up the device name, workgroups, and network folders for your USB device. On the Advanced tab, select USB Storage > Advanced Settings to display the following screen:

You can use this screen to specify access to the USB storage device. Network Device Name. The default is readyshare. This is the name used to access the USB device connected to the router. Workgroup. If you are using a Windows workgroup rather than a domain, the workgroup name is displayed here. The name works only in an operating system that supports NetBIOS, such as Microsoft Windows. Access Method. The access methods are described here. Network Connection. Enabled by default, this connection allows all users on the LAN to have access to the USB drive. HTTP. Enabled by default. You can type http://readyshare.routerlogin.net/shares to access the USB drive. HTTP (via internet). Disabled by default. If you enable this setting, remote users can type http://<public IP address/shares> (for example, http://1.1.10.102/shares) or a URL domain name to access the USB drive over the Internet. This setting supports file uploading only. USB Storage 48 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 FTP. Disabled by default. FTP (via internet). Disabled by default. If you enable this setting, remote users can access the USB drive through FTP over the Internet. This setting supports both downloading and uploading of files. Available Network Folders You might need to scroll down to view this section of the screen:

Share Name. If only 1 device is connected, the default share name is USB_Storage. You can click the name shown, or you can type it in the address field of your web Browser. If Not Shared is shown, the default share has been deleted, and no other share for the root folder exists. Click the link to change this setting. Read/Write Access. Shows the permissions and access controls on the network folder:

All - no password (the default) allows all users to access the network folder. The password for admin is the same one that you use to log in to the router. Folder Name. Full path used by the network folder. Volume Name. Volume name from the storage device (either USB drive or HDD). Total/Free Space. Shows the current utilization of the storage device. Safely Remove a USB Drive To safely remove a USB disk drive so that no users can access it, select USB Storage >

Basic Settings, and click the Safely Remove USB Device button. This takes the drive offline. USB Storage 49 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Media Server Settings By default, the router is set up to act as a Ready DLNA Media server, which lets you view movies and photos on DLNA/UPnP AVcompliant media players, such as Xbox360, Playstation, and NETGEARs Digital Entertainer Live. To view these settings, select Advanced > USB Storage > Media Server to display the following screen:

By default the Enable Media Server check box and the Automatic (when new files are added) radio button are selected. When these options are selected, the router scans for media files whenever new files are added to the ReadySHARE USB hard drive. Specify Approved USB Devices For more security, you can set up the router to share approved USB devices only. You can access this feature from the Advanced Setup menu on the Advanced tab. USB Storage 50 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To set up approved USB devices:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > USB Settings. The following screen displays:

2. Click the Approved Devices button. The USB Drive Approved Devices screen displays:

This screen shows the approved USB devices and the available USB devices. You can remove or add approved USB devices. 3. To add an approved USB device, select it from the Available USB Devices list, and then click Add. 4. Select the Allow only approved devices check box. 5. Click Apply so that your change takes effect. USB Storage 51 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 If you want to work with another USB device, you have to first click the Safely Remove USB Device button for the currently connected USB device. Connect the other USB device, and repeat this process. Connect to the USB Drive from a Remote Computer To connect to the USB drive from remote computers with a web browser, you have to use the routers Internet port IP address. If you are using Dynamic DNS, you can type the DNS name, rather than the IP address. You can view the routers Internet IP address from the dashboard on the Basic Home screen or the Advanced Home screen. Access the Routers USB Drive Remotely Using FTP To connect to the routers USB drive using a web browser:

1. Connect to the router by typing ftp:// and the Internet port IP address in the address field of Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator, for example:

ftp://10.1.65.4 If you are using Dynamic DNS, you can type the DNS name, rather than the IP address. 2. Type the account name and password that has access rights to the USB drive. The user name (account name) for All no password is guest. 3. The directories of the USB drive that your account has access to are displayed, for example, share/partition1/directory1. You can now read and copy files from the USB directory. USB Storage 52 6. ReadySHARE Printer 6 ReadySHARE Printer is compatible with Macs and Windows PCs. It lets you connect a USB printer to the routers USB port, and access it wirelessly. This chapter contains the following sections:

ReadySHARE Printer USB Control Center Utility Desktop NETGEAR genie For additional about ReadySHARE features, see www.netgear.com/readyshare. 53 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 ReadySHARE Printer You can connect a USB printer to the routers USB port, and share it among Windows and Mac computers on the network. To set up ReadySHARE Printer:

1. Connect the USB printer to the routers USB port with a USB printer cable. 2. Install the USB printer driver software on each computer that will share the printer. If you do not have the printer driver, contact the printer manufacturer to find and download the most recent printer driver software. 3. On each computer that will share the printer, download the NETGEAR USB Control Center utility. The NETGEAR USB utility has a Mac version and a Windows version, which you can access in two different ways:

From the ReadySHARE Printer area of this URL:

www.netgear.com/readyshare From the ReadySHARE tab of the Desktop NETGEAR genie. (See Desktop NETGEAR genie on page 62). Note: You have to install this utility before you can use the ReadySHARE Printer feature. For the ReadySHARE Printer feature to work, this utility has to be runing in the background. ReadySHARE Printer 54 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 4. Follow the instructions to install the NETGEAR USB Control Center utility. 5. After you have installed the utility, select the language. ReadySHARE Printer 55 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 6. If this is the first time you are accessing the utility, you are asked to select the printer and click the Connect button. Once the connection is established, the status changes to Manually connected by xxx. ReadySHARE Printer 56 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Note that you can click the Disconnect button at any time to release the connection. The status then changes to Available. Once the Connect button has been clicked once on all of the computers in the network, the utility on each of them automatically handles the printing queue and handling. The status of the printer should appear as Available on all of the computers. When the status is Available, you can use the USB printer. When the status is Manually connected by xxx, only the xxx computer can use the printer. Other network devices must wait until the xxx computer has released the connection, or until the connection times out (the default time-out value is 30 seconds). ReadySHARE Printer 57 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 You can set the value for the default time-out time from the Tools > Configuration screen. The USB Control Center utility must be running for the computer to be able to print to the USB printer attached to the router. If you exit the utility, printing does not work. Some firewall software, such as Comodo, blocks the ReadySHARE Print utility from accessing the USB printer. If you do not see the printer in the utility, you can disable the firewall temporarily to allow the utility to work. 7. If your printer supports scanning, make sure that the printer is in the Available state, and click the Network Scanner button. This activates the Scanner window so you can use the printer for scanning. ReadySHARE Printer 58 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 USB Control Center Utility The USB Control Center Utility allows you to control a shared USB device from your computer that is connected to the USB port on your router. The utility allows you to control a printer, a scanner, or an audio speaker. The utility has to be installed on each computer on your network from which you want to control the device. You can download this utility for PC and Mac at www.netgear.com/landing/en-us/readyshare.aspx. When you launch the USB Control Center Utility, a screen similar to the following displays:

This is the main screen, which shows a device icon, the description for this USB device, and its status. Available. The device is available from the computer that you are using. Waiting to Connect. You need to connect to this device from the computer that you are using. If this is the first time you are connecting, you might be prompted to install the device driver. Menu selections:

System. Exit the utility. Tools. Access the Control Center Configuration to set up your shared USB device. See the following section, Control Center Configuration. About. View details about the USB Control Center software. ReadySHARE Printer 59 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Control Center Configuration Select Tools >Configuration to display the following screen:

Automatically execute when logging on Windows. Enable this utility to start automatically when you are logged in to Windows. Timeout. Specify the timeout value for holding the USB resource when it is not in use. Language. Select the display language for this utility. USB Printer The first time you use a printer, you need to click Connect. You might be asked to install the driver for this printer. After the driver is installed, the printer status changes to Available. Note: Some USB printers (for example: HP and Lexmark printer) request that Do not connect the USB cable until you are prompted by the installation software in their installation. If the USB printer is detected and connected automatically, you need to disconnect the printer, and then wait for the prompt asking you to click Connect. ReadySHARE Printer 60

 

 

N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Once the printer shows Available status, it is no longer grayed out in a Paused state in the Windows Printers window. This USB printer is ready. The utility does not need to always hold the connection of this USB printer. Once there is any print job for this printer, the USB utility connects to this USB printer automatically then prints. After the print job is done, the printer status returns to the Paused state. Scan with a Multi-Function Printer You can use the scan feature of a multi-function printer. 1. Make sure that the printers status shows as Available status. 2. Click the Network Scanner button. This activates the scanner window to perform scans. USB Speaker To control a USB speaker:

1. Select the USB speaker. 2. Click the Connect button to connect this speaker, or click Disconnect to disconnect the speaker. If you click Connect, and someone else is already connected to the speaker, a request is sent to that person. The person who receives the request can click an Accept or Reject button. If someone is connected to the speaker and it is not being used (the router does not detect any activity), the router holds the connection for the amount of time that is in the timeout value, and then makes it available. ReadySHARE Printer 61 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Desktop NETGEAR genie Desktop NETGEAR genie is the easy dashboard for managing, monitoring, and repairing your home network. Automatically repair common wireless network problems. Have easy access to router features like Live Parental Controls, guest access, broadband usage meter, speed test, and more. Use the Network map to see all devices on your home network. To download the free NETGEAR genie, go to this page at the NETGEAR website:

www.NETGEAR.com/genie. ReadySHARE Printer 62 7. Security Keeping unwanted content out of your network 7 This chapter explains how to use the basic firewall features of the router to prevent objectionable content from reaching the PCs and other devices connected to your network. This chapter includes the following sections:

Keyword Blocking of HTTP Traffic Block Services (Port Filtering) Schedule Blocking Security Event Email Notifications 63 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Keyword Blocking of HTTP Traffic Use keyword blocking to prevent certain types of HTTP traffic from accessing your network. The blocking can be always or according to a schedule. 1. Select Advanced > Security > Block Sites to display the following screen:

2. Select one of the keyword blocking options:

3. Per Schedule. Turn on keyword blocking according to the Schedule screen settings. Always. Turn on keyword blocking all the time, independent of the Schedule screen. In the Keyword field, enter a keyword or domain, click Add Keyword, and click Apply. The Keyword list supports up to 32 entries. Here are some sample entries:

Specify XXX to block http://www.badstuff.com/xxx.html. Specify .com if you want to allow only sites with domain suffixes such as .edu or .gov. Enter a period (.) to block all Internet browsing access. To delete a keyword or domain:

1. Select the keyword you want to delete from the list. 2. Click Delete Keyword, and then Apply to save your changes. To specify a trusted computer:

You can exempt one trusted computer from blocking and logging. The computer you exempt has to have a fixed IP address. 1. 2. Click Apply to save your changes. In the Trusted IP Address field, enter the IP address. Security 64 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Block Services (Port Filtering) Services are functions performed by server computers at the request of client computers. For example, web servers serve web pages, time servers serve time and date information, and game hosts serve data about other players moves. When a computer on the Internet sends a request for service to a server computer, the requested service is identified by a service or port number. This number appears as the destination port number in the transmitted IP packets. For example, a packet that is sent with the destination port number 80 is an HTTP

(web server) request. The service numbers for many common protocols are defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF at http://www.ietf.org/) and published in RFC1700, Assigned Numbers. Service numbers for other applications are typically chosen from the range 1024 to 65535 by the authors of the application. Although the router already holds a list of many service port numbers, you are not limited to these choices. You can often determine port number information by contacting the publisher of the application, by asking user groups or newsgroups, or by searching. The Block Services screen lets you add and block specific Internet services by computers on your network. This is called service blocking or port filtering. To add a service for blocking, first determine which port number or range of numbers are used by the application. To block services:

1. Select Advanced > Security > Block Services to display the following screen:

2. Select either Per Schedule or Always to enable service blocking, and click Apply. If you selected Per Schedule, specify a time period in the Schedule screen as described in Schedule Blocking on page 67. Security 65 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 3. Click Add to add a service. The Block Services Setup screen displays:

4. From the Service Type list, select the application or service to allow or block. The list already displays several common services, but you are not limited to these choices. To add any additional services or applications that do not already appear, select User Defined. If you know that the application uses either TCP or UDP, select the appropriate protocol. If you are not sure, select Both. 5. 6. Enter the starting and ending port numbers. If the application uses a single port number, enter that number in both fields. 7. Select the radio button for the IP address configuration you want to block, and enter the IP addresses. You can block the specified service for a single computer, a range of computers with consecutive IP addresses, or all computers on your network. 8. Click Add to enable your Block Services Setup selections. Security 66 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Schedule Blocking You can specify the days and time that you want to block Internet access. To schedule blocking:

1. Select Advanced > Security > Schedule to display the following screen:

2. Set up the schedule for blocking keywords and services. Days to Block. Select days on which you want to apply blocking by selecting the appropriate check boxes, or select Every Day to select the check boxes for all days. Time of Day to Block. Select a start and end time in 24-hour format, or select All Day for 24-hour blocking. 3. Select your time zone from the list. If you use daylight savings time, select the Automatically adjust for daylight savings time check box. 4. Click Apply to save your settings. Security 67 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Security Event Email Notifications To receive logs and alerts by email, provide your email information in the Email screen, and specify which alerts you want to receive and how often. To set up email notifications:

1. Select Advanced > Security > Email to display the following screen:

3. 2. To receive email logs and alerts from the router, select the Turn Email Notification On check box. In the Your Outgoing Mail Server field, enter the name of your ISPs outgoing (SMTP) mail server (such as mail.myISP.com). You might be able to find this information in the configuration screen of your email program. If you leave this field blank, log and alert messages are not sent by email. 4. Enter the email address to which logs and alerts are sent in the Send to This Email Address field. This email address is also used for the From address. If you leave this field blank, log and alert messages are not sent by email. If your outgoing email server requires authentication, select the My Mail Server requires authentication check box. Fill in the User Name and Password fields for the outgoing email server. 5. 6. You can have email alerts sent immediately when someone attempts to visit a blocked site, and you can specify that logs are sent automatically. If you select the Weekly, Daily, or Hourly option and the log fills up before the specified period, the log is automatically emailed to the specified email address. After the log is sent, the log is cleared from the routers memory. If the router cannot email the log file, the log buffer might fill up. In this case, the router overwrites the log and discards its contents. 7. Click Apply to save your settings. Security 68 8. Administration Managing your network 8 This chapter describes the router settings for administering and maintaining your router and home network. See also Remote Management on page checking the status of your router over the Internet, and Traffic Meter on page information about monitoring the volume of Internet traffic passing through your routers Internet port. This chapter includes the following sections:

105 for information about upgrading or 109 for Upgrade the Router Firmware View Router Status View Logs of Web Access or Attempted Web Access Manage the Configuration File Set Password Time Machine 69 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Upgrade the Router Firmware The router firmware (routing software) is stored in flash memory. You can update the firmware from the Administration menu on the Advanced tab. You might see a message at the top of the NETGEAR genie screens when new firmware is available for your product. You can use the Check button on the Router Update screen to check and update to the latest firmware for your product if new firmware is available. To check for new firmware and update your router:

1. Select Advanced > Administration > Router Update to display the following screen:

Click Check 2. Click Check. The router finds new firmware information if any is available. 3. Click Yes to update and locate the firmware you downloaded (the file ends in .img). WARNING:

When uploading firmware to the router, do not interrupt the web browser by closing the window, clicking a link, or loading a new page. If the browser is interrupted, it could corrupt the firmware. When the upload is complete, your router restarts. The upgrade process typically takes about 1 minute. Read the new firmware release notes to determine whether or not you need to reconfigure the router after upgrading. Administration 70 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 View Router Status To view router status and usage information, select Advanced Home or select Administration > Router Status to display the following screen:

Router Information Hardware Version. The router model. Firmware Version. The version of the router firmware. It changes if you upgrade the router firmware. GUI Language Version. The localized language of the user interface. LAN Port. MAC Address. The Media Access Control address. This is the unique physical address being used by the Ethernet (LAN) port of the router. IP Address. The IP address being used by the Ethernet (LAN) port of the router. The default is 192.168.1.1. DHCP Server. Identifies whether the routers built-in DHCP server is active for the LAN-attached devices. Internet Provider (WAN) Setup MAC Address. The Media Access Control address. This is the unique physical address being used by the Internet (WAN) port of the router. IP Address. The IP address being used by the Internet (WAN) port of the router. If no address is shown or the address is 0.0.0, the router cannot connect to the Internet. Administration 71 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Connection. This shows if the router is using a fixed IP address on the WAN. If the value is DHCP Client, the router obtains an IP address dynamically from the ISP. IP Subnet Mask. The IP subnet mask being used by the Internet (WAN) port of the router. Domain Name Server. The Domain Name Server addresses being used by the router. A Domain Name Server translates human-language URLs such as www.netgear.com into IP addresses. Statistics Button On the Router Status screen, in the Internet Provider (WAN) Setup pane, click the Statistics button to display the following screen:

TxPkts. The number of packets transmitted on this port since reset or manual clear. Figure 6. System up time and poll interval statistics System Up Time. The time elapsed since the router was last restarted. Port. The statistics for the WAN (Internet) and LAN (Ethernet) ports. For each port, the screen displays:

Status. The link status of the port. RxPkts. The number of packets received on this port since reset or manual clear. Collisions. The number of collisions on this port since reset or manual clear. Rx B/s. The current reception (inbound) bandwidth used on the WAN and LAN ports. Up Time. The time elapsed since this port acquired the link. Poll Interval. The interval at which the statistics are updated in this screen. To change the polling frequency, enter a time in seconds in the Poll Interval field, and click Set Interval. To stop the polling entirely, click Stop. Tx B/s. The current transmission (outbound) bandwidth used on the WAN and LAN ports. Administration 72 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Connection Status Button On the Router Status screen in the Internet Connection pane, click the Connection Status button to view connection status information. Figure 7. View connection status information The Release button returns the status of all items to 0. The Renew button refreshes the items. The Close Window button closes the Connection Status screen. IP Address. The IP address that is assigned to the router. Subnet Mask. The subnet mask that is assigned to the router. Default Gateway. The IP address for the default gateway that the router communicates with. DHCP Server. The IP address for the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server that provides the TCP/IP configuration for all the computers that are connected to the router. DNS Server. The IP address of the Domain Name Service server that provides translation of network names to IP addresses. Lease Obtained. The date and time when the lease was obtained. Lease Expires. The date and time that the lease expires. Administration 73 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Wireless Settings (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) The following settings are displayed:

Name (SSID). The wireless network name (SSID) used by the router. The default names for the 5 GHz ends in -5G to distinguish it from the 2.4 GHz network. Region. The geographic region where the router is being used. It might be illegal to use the wireless features of the router in some parts of the world. Channel. Identifies the operating channel of the wireless port being used. The default channel is Auto. When Auto is selected, the router will find the best operating channel available. If you notice interference from nearby devices, you can select a different channel. Channels 1, 6, and 11 will not interfere with each other. Mode. Indicates the wireless communication mode: Up to 54 Mbps, Up to 217 Mbps

(default), and Up to 450 Mbps. Wireless AP. Indicates whether the radio feature of the router is enabled. If this feature is not enabled, the Wireless LED on the front panel is off. Broadcast Name. Indicates whether the router is broadcasting its SSID. Wireless Isolation. Select this check box only if you want to prevent wireless connections to the router. Wi-Fi Protected Setup. Indicates whether Wi-Fi Protected Setup is configured for this network. Administration 74 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Guest Network (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) Name (SSID). The 11N wireless network name (SSID) used by the router. The default names are NETGEAR-Guest and NETGEAR-5G-Guest. Wireless AP. Indicates whether the radio feature of the router is enabled. If this feature is not enabled, the Wireless LED on the front panel is off. Broadcast Name. Indicates whether the router is broadcasting its SSID. Wireless Isolation. Select this check box only if you want to prevent wireless connections to the router. Allow guest to access My Local Network. If selected, any user who connects to this SSID can access local networks associated with the router. View Logs of Web Access or Attempted Web Access The log is a detailed record of the websites you have accessed or attempted to access. Up to 256 entries are stored in the log. Log entries appear only when keyword blocking is enabled and no log entries are made for the trusted user. Administration 75 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Select Advanced > Administration > Logs. The Logs screen displays. The log screen shows the following information:

Date and time. The date and time the log entry was recorded. Source IP. The IP address of the initiating device for this log entry. Target address. The name or IP address of the website or news group visited or to which access was attempted. Action. Whether the access was blocked or allowed. To refresh the log screen, click the Refresh button. To clear the log entries, click the Clear Log button. To email the log immediately, click the Send Log button. Administration 76 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Manage the Configuration File The configuration settings of the N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router are stored within the router in a configuration file. You can back up (save) this file to your computer, restore it, or reset it to the factory default settings. Back Up Settings To back up the routers configuration settings:

1. Select Advanced > Administration > Backup Settings to display the following screen:

2. Click Back Up to save a copy of the current settings. 3. Choose a location to store the .cfg file that is on a computer on your network. Restore Configuration Settings To restore configuration settings that you backed up:

1. Enter the full path to the file on your network, or click the Browse button to find the file. 2. When you have located the .cfg file, click the Restore button to upload the file to the router. Upon completion, the router reboots. WARNING:

Do not interrupt the reboot process. Administration 77 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Erase Under some circumstances (for example, if you move the router to a different network or if you have forgotten the password), you might want to erase the configuration and restore the factory default settings. You can either use the Restore Factory Settings button on the back of the router (see Factory Settings on page Erase sets the user name to admin, the password to password, and the LAN IP address to 192.168.1.1, and enables the routers DHCP. 120), or you can click the Erase button in this screen. Administration 78 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Set Password This feature allows you to change the default password that is used to log in to the router with the user name admin. This is not the same as changing the password for wireless access. The label on the bottom of your router shows your unique wireless network name (SSID) and password for wireless access (see Label on page 11). To set the password for the user name admin:

1. Select Advanced > Administration > Set Password to display the following screen:

2. Type the old password, and type the new password twice in the fields on this screen. 3. If you want to be able to recover the password, select the Enable Password Recovery check box. 4. Click Apply so that your changes take effect. Password Recovery NETGEAR recommends that you enable password recovery if you change the password for the routers user name of admin. Then you will have an easy way to recover the password if it is forgotten. This recovery process is supported in Internet Explorer, Firefox, and Chrome browsers, but not in the Safari browser. To set up password recovery:

1. Select the Enable Password Recovery check box. 2. Select two security questions, and provide answers to them. 3. Click Apply to save your changes. When you use your browser to access the router, the login window displays. If password recovery is enabled, when you click Cancel, the password recovery process starts. You can then enter the saved answers to the security questions to recover the password. Administration 79 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Time Machine Time Machine works only on Mac computers. It automatically backs up everything on your computer to a USB hard drive that is connected to the Mac. Set Up Time Machine If you are already using Time Machine software with your USB hard drive, you can skip the set up and go directly to the following section, Access the Connected USB Hard Drive. To set up Time Machine:

1. Physically connect the USB hard drive to your Mac. 2. On your Mac, go to the magnifying glass at the top right of the desktop, and search for disk utility. 3. Open the Disk Utility and format your drive, as shown here. The router supports GUID and MBR partitions only. To see how to change the partition scheme, see Change the Partition Scheme on page You can now use Time Machine wirelessly by connecting the USB hard drive to your C router. 85. Administration 80 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Access the Connected USB Hard Drive After the initial set up explained in the previous section, you can access the connected USB hard drive from Your Mac or PC. To access the drive:

1. Start ReadySHARE:

On a Mac: Select Go > Connect to Server, and then type: smb://readyshare On a PC: Select Start > Run, and then type: \\readyshare 2. From your MAC desktop, open Macintosh HD. 3. Click the Connect As button. In the pop-up window, select Registered User, and enter admin as the user name and password as the password. Click Connect. After connecting successfully, you can list your connected devices. Note that you see one extra device, called admin, whenever you log in as admin. If you are backing up a large amount of data, befor eyou contineu, see Before You Back up a Large Amount of Data on page 83. 4. From the Apple menu, select System Preferences. Open Time Machine. Click Select Disk and choose the backup disk. Click the Use for Backup button to complete your selection. If you do not see the USB partition that you want to use for backup in the Time Machine disk list, go to MAC finder, and click that USB partition.Then that device displays in the Time Machine list. Administration 81 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 You are prompted to log in. Show All Time Machine Time Machine Enter your name and password for the server WNDR4500 so that Time Machine can access it. Connect as:

Guest Registered User Name:

admin Password:

Time Machine Cancel Connect OFF ON N your music, pictures, and other inportant files. Since Time yyyyooouuurrr mmmuuusssiiiccc, ppppiiiccctttuuurrreeesss, aaannnddd ooottthhheeerrr iiinnnppppooorrrtttaaannnttt fififillleeesss. SSSiiinnnccceee TTTiiimmmeee Machine keeps daily backups, you can revisit your Mac as it MMaacchhiinnee kkeeeeppss ddaaiillyy bbaacckkuuppss,, yyoouu ccaann rreevviissiitt yyoouurr MMaacc aass iitt appeared in the past. Click the lock to prevent further changes.

?

Show Time Machine status in the menu bar 5. Enter the password (the same one you use to log in to the router as admin) and backup begins. T_Drive WNDR4500 Connected as: admin Disconnect admin S_Drive T_Drive USB_Storage DEVICES iDisk Remote Disc NO NAME Mac OS X Install DVD SHARED WNDR3800 PLACES Desktop tecqa Applications Documents SEARCH FOR Today Yesterday Past Week All Images All Movies All Documents 999.54 GB available Administration 82 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Before You Back up a Large Amount of Data Before you back up a large amount of data with Time Machine, NETGEAR recommends that you do the following to ensure a successful operation:

1. Upgrade the operating system of the Mac machine. 2. Verify and repair the backup disk and the local disk. 3. Verify and repair the permissions on the local disk. 4. Set Energy Saver. a. From the Apple menu, select System Preferences. b. From the View menu, select Energy Saver. c. On the Energy Saver screen, select Wake for Ethernet network access. d. Click the Back arrow to exit this screen. Your changes will be saved. 5. Modify your Security settings. a. From the Apple menu, select System Preferences. b. From the View menu, select Security. Administration 83 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 c. On the Security screen, leave the Log out after minutes of inactivity check box cleared (not selected). Administration 84 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Change the Partition Scheme To run with the router, the partition scheme on your Mac has to be set to either GUID or MBR. To make sure the partition scheme is set to one of these supported schemes:

1. Open the Disk Utility and select your USB drive. 2. Select the Partition tab. 3. Select Volume Scheme and set the number of partitions you would like to use. 4. Click Options, and the Partition options appear. 5. Select GUID Partition Table or Master Boot Record (MBR). 6. Click OK. Administration 85 9. Advanced Settings 9 This chapter describes the advanced features of your router. The information is for users with a solid understanding of networking concepts who want to set the router up for unique situations such as when remote access from the Internet by IP or domain name is needed. This chapter includes the following sections:

Advanced Wireless Settings Wireless Repeating Function (WDS) Port Forwarding and Triggering Set Up Port Forwarding to Local Servers Set Up Port Triggering Dynamic DNS Static Routes Remote Management USB Settings Universal Plug and Play IPv6 Traffic Meter 86 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Advanced Wireless Settings Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Wireless Settings to display the following screen:

Scroll to view more settings The following settings are available in this screen:

Enable Wireless Router Radio. You can completely turn off the wireless portion of the wireless router by clearing this check box. Select this check box again to enable the wireless portion of the router. When the wireless radio is disabled, other members of your household can use the router by connecting their computers to the router with an Ethernet cable. Note: The Fragmentation Length, CTS/RTS Threshold, and Preamble Mode options are reserved for wireless testing and advanced configuration only. Do not change these settings. Turn off wireless signal by schedule. You can use this feature to turn off the wireless signal from your router at times when you do not need a wireless connection. For instance, you could turn it off for the weekend if you leave town. WPS Settings.You can add WPS devices to your network. AP Mode. You can make the WNDR4500v2 function as an access point. Wireless Card Access List. Click the Set Up Access List button display the Wireless Card Access List screen. On this screen you can restrict access to your network to specific devices based on their MAC address. Advanced Settings 87 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Wireless Repeating Function (WDS) You can set the N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router up to be used as a wireless access point (AP). Doing this enables the router to act as a wireless repeater. A wireless repeater connects to another wireless router as a client where the network to which it connects becomes the ISP service. Wireless repeating is a type of Wireless Distribution System (WDS). A WDS allows a wireless network to be expanded through multiple access points instead of using a wired backbone to link them. The following figure shows a wireless repeating scenario. Base station access point Figure 8. Wireless repeating scenario Repeater access point Note: If you use the wireless repeating function, you need to select either WEP or None as a security option in the Wireless Settings screen. The WEP option displays only if you select the wireless mode Up to 54 Mbps in the Wireless Settings screen. Wireless Base Station. The router acts as the parent access point, bridging traffic to and from the child repeater access point, as well as handling wireless and wired local computers. Advanced Settings 88 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To configure this mode, you have to know the MAC addresses of the child repeater access point. Wireless Repeater. The router sends all traffic from its local wireless or wired computers to a remote access point. To configure this mode, you have to know the MAC address of the remote parent access point. The WNDR4500v2 router is always in dual band concurrent mode, unless you turn off one radio. Be aware that if you enable the wireless repeater in either radio band, the wireless base station or wireless repeater cannot be enabled in the other radio band. However, if you enable the wireless base station in either radio band and use the other radio band as a wireless router or wireless base station, dual band concurrent mode is not affected. For you to set up a wireless network with WDS, the following conditions have to be met for both access points:

Both access points have to use the same SSID, wireless channel, and encryption mode. Both access points have to be on the same LAN IP subnet. That is, all the access point LAN IP addresses are in the same network. All LAN devices (wired and wireless computers) have to be configured to operate in the same LAN network address range as the access points. Wireless Repeating Function Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Wireless Repeating to view or change wireless repeater settings for the router. Scroll to view more settings Enable Wireless Repeating Function. Select the check box for the 2.4 network to use the wireless repeating function. GHz or 5 GHz Advanced Settings 89 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Wireless MAC of this router. This field displays the MAC address for your router for your reference. You will need to enter this MAC address in the corresponding Wireless Repeating Function screen of the other access point you are using. Wireless Repeater. If your router is the repeater, select this check box. Repeater IP Address. If your router is the repeater, enter the IP address of the other access point. Disable Wireless Client Association. If your router is the repeater, selecting this check box means that wireless clients cannot associate with it. Only LAN client associations are allowed.

-

-

If you are setting up a point-to-point bridge, select this check box. If you want all client traffic to go through the other access point (repeater with wireless client association), leave this check box cleared. Base Station MAC Address. If your router is the repeater, enter the MAC address for the access point that is the base station. Wireless Base Station. If your router is the base station, select this check box. Disable Wireless Client Association. If your router is the base station, selecting this check box means that wireless clients cannot associate with it. Only LAN client associations are allowed. Repeater MAC Address (1 through 4). If your router is the base station, it can act as the parent of up to 4 other access points. Enter the MAC addresses of the other access points in these fields. Set Up the Base Station The wireless repeating function works only in hub and spoke mode. The units cannot be daisy-chained. You have to know the wireless settings for both units. You have to know the MAC address of the remote unit. First, set up the base station, and then set up the repeater. To set up the base station:

1. Set up both units with exactly the same wireless settings (SSID, mode, channel, and security). Note that the wireless security option has to be set to None or WEP. Advanced Settings 90 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 2. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Wireless Repeating Function to display the Wireless Repeating Function screen. Scroll to view more settings 3. In the Wireless Repeating Function screen (depending on the frequency you want to use), select the Enable Wireless Repeating Function check box and select the Wireless Base Station radio button. 4. Enter the MAC address for one or more repeater units. 5. Click Apply to save your changes. Set Up a Repeater Unit Use a wired Ethernet connection to set up the repeater unit to avoid conflicts with the wireless connection to the base station. Note: If you are using the WNDR4500v2 base station with a non-NETGEAR router as the repeater, you might need to change additional configuration settings. In particular, you should disable the DHCP server function on the wireless repeater AP. To configure the router as a repeater unit:

1. Log in to the router that will be the repeater. Select Basic > Wireless Settings and verify that the wireless settings match the base unit exactly. The wireless security option has to be set to WEP or None. 2. Select Advanced > Wireless Repeating Function, and select the Enable Wireless Repeating Function check box and the Wireless Repeater radio button. 3. Fill in the Repeater IP Address field. This IP address has to be in the same subnet as the base station, but different from the LAN IP address of the base station. Advanced Settings 91 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 4. Click Apply to save your changes. 5. Verify connectivity across the LANs. A computer on any wireless or wired LAN segment of the router should be able to connect to the Internet or share files and printers with any other wireless or wired computer or server connected to the other access point. Port Forwarding and Triggering By default, the router blocks inbound traffic from the Internet to your computers except replies to your outbound traffic. You might need to create exceptions to this rule for these purposes:

To allow remote computers on the Internet to access a server on your local network. To allow certain applications and games to work correctly when their replies are not recognized by your router. Your router provides two features for creating these exceptions: port forwarding and port triggering. The next sections provide background information to help you understand how port forwarding and port triggering work, and the differences between the two. Remote Computer Access Basics When a computer on your network needs to access a computer on the Internet, your computer sends your router a message containing the source and destination address and process information. Before forwarding your message to the remote computer, your router has to modify the source information and create and track the communication session so that replies can be routed back to your computer. Here is an example of normal outbound traffic and the resulting inbound responses:

1. You open a browser, and your operating system assigns port number 5678 to this browser session. 2. You type http://www.example.com into the URL field, and your computer creates a web page request message with the following address and port information. The request message is sent to your router. Source address. Your computers IP address. Source port number. 5678, which is the browser session. Destination address. The IP address of www.example.com, which your computer finds by asking a DNS server. Destination port number. 80, which is the standard port number for a web server process. 3. Your router creates an entry in its internal session table describing this communication session between your computer and the web server at www.example.com. Before sending the web page request message to www.example.com, your router stores the original Advanced Settings 92 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 information and then modifies the source information in the request message, performing Network Address Translation (NAT):

The source address is replaced with your routers public IP address. This is necessary because your computer uses a private IP address that is not globally unique and cannot be used on the Internet. The source port number is changed to a number chosen by the router, such as 33333. This is necessary because two computers could independently be using the same session number. Your router then sends this request message through the Internet to the web server at www.example.com. 4. The web server at www.example.com composes a return message with the requested web page data. The return message contains the following address and port information. The web server then sends this reply message to your router. Source address. The IP address of www.example.com. Source port number. 80, which is the standard port number for a web server process. Destination address. The public IP address of your router. Destination port number. 33333. 5. Upon receiving the incoming message, your router checks its session table to determine whether there is an active session for port number 33333. Finding an active session, the router then modifies the message to restore the original address information replaced by NAT. Your router sends this reply message to your computer, which displays the web page from www.example.com. The message now contains the following address and port information. Source address. The IP address of www.example.com. Source port number. 80, which is the standard port number for a web server process. Destination address. Your computers IP address. Destination port number. 5678, which is the browser session that made the initial request. 6. When you finish your browser session, your router eventually detects a period of inactivity in the communications. Your router then removes the session information from its session table, and incoming traffic is no longer accepted on port number 33333. Port Triggering to Open Incoming Ports In the preceding example, requests are sent to a remote computer by your router from a particular service port number, and replies from the remote computer to your router are directed to that port number. If the remote server sends a reply back to a different port number, your router does not recognize it and discards it. However, some application servers

(such as FTP and IRC servers) send replies back to multiple port numbers. Using the port triggering function of your router, you can tell the router to open additional incoming ports when a particular outgoing port originates a session. Advanced Settings 93 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 An example is Internet Relay Chat (IRC). Your computer connects to an IRC server at destination port 6667. The IRC server not only responds to your originating source port, but also sends an identify message to your computer on port 113. Using port triggering, you can tell the router, When you initiate a session with destination port 6667, you have to also allow incoming traffic on port 113 to reach the originating computer. Using steps similar to the preceding example, the following sequence shows the effects of the port triggering rule you have defined:

1. You open an IRC client program to start a chat session on your computer. 2. Your IRC client composes a request message to an IRC server using a destination port number of 6667, the standard port number for an IRC server process. Your computer then sends this request message to your router. 3. Your router creates an entry in its internal session table describing this communication session between your computer and the IRC server. Your router stores the original information, performs Network Address Translation (NAT) on the source address and port, and sends this request message through the Internet to the IRC server. 4. Noting your port triggering rule and having observed the destination port number of 6667, your router creates an additional session entry to send any incoming port 113 traffic to your computer. 5. The IRC server sends a return message to your router using the NAT-assigned source port

(as in the previous example, say port 33333) as the destination port. The IRC server also sends an identify message to your router with destination port 113. 6. Upon receiving the incoming message to destination port 33333, your router checks its session table to determine whether there is an active session for port number 33333. Finding an active session, the router restores the original address information replaced by NAT and sends this reply message to your computer. 7. Upon receiving the incoming message to destination port 113, your router checks its session table and learns that there is an active session for port 113, associated with your computer. The router replaces the messages destination IP address with your computers IP address and forwards the message to your computer. 8. When you finish your chat session, your router eventually senses a period of inactivity in the communications. The router then removes the session information from its session table, and incoming traffic is no longer accepted on port numbers 33333 or 113. To configure port triggering, you need to know which inbound ports the application needs. Also, you need to know the number of the outbound port that will trigger the opening of the inbound ports. You can usually determine this information by contacting the publisher of the application or user groups or newsgroups. Note: Only one computer at a time can use the triggered application. Port Forwarding to Permit External Host Communications In both of the preceding examples, your computer initiates an application session with a server computer on the Internet. However, you might need to allow a client computer on the Advanced Settings 94 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Internet to initiate a connection to a server computer on your network. Normally, your router ignores any inbound traffic that is not a response to your own outbound traffic. You can configure exceptions to this default rule by using the port forwarding feature. A typical application of port forwarding can be shown by reversing the client-server relationship from the previous web server example. In this case, a remote computers browser needs to access a web server running on a computer in your local network. Using port forwarding, you can tell the router, When you receive incoming traffic on port 80 (the standard port number for a web server process), forward it to the local computer at 192.168.1.123. The following sequence shows the effects of the port forwarding rule you have defined:

1. The user of a remote computer opens a browser and requests a web page from www.example.com, which resolves to the public IP address of your router. The remote computer composes a web page request message with the following destination information:

Destination address. The IP address of www.example.com, which is the address of your router. Destination port number. 80, which is the standard port number for a web server process. The remote computer then sends this request message through the Internet to your router. 2. Your router receives the request message and looks in its rules table for any rules covering the disposition of incoming port 80 traffic. Your port forwarding rule specifies that incoming port 80 traffic should be forwarded to local IP address 192.168.1.123. Therefore, your router modifies the destination information in the request message:

The destination address is replaced with 192.168.1.123. Your router then sends this request message to your local network. 3. Your web server at 192.168.1.123 receives the request and composes a return message with the requested web page data. Your web server then sends this reply message to your router. 4. Your router performs Network Address Translation (NAT) on the source IP address, and sends this request message through the Internet to the remote computer, which displays the web page from www.example.com. To configure port forwarding, you need to know which inbound ports the application needs. You usually can determine this information by contacting the publisher of the application or the relevant user groups and newsgroups. How Port Forwarding Differs from Port Triggering The following points summarize the differences between port forwarding and port triggering:

Port triggering can be used by any computer on your network, although only one computer can use it at a time. Port forwarding is configured for a single computer on your network. Advanced Settings 95 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Port triggering does require that you know the computers IP address in advance. The IP address is captured automatically. Port forwarding requires that you specify the computers IP address during configuration, and the IP address can never change. Port triggering requires specific outbound traffic to open the inbound ports, and the triggered ports are closed after a period of no activity. Port forwarding is always active and does not need to be triggered. Set Up Port Forwarding to Local Servers Using the port forwarding feature, you can allow certain types of incoming traffic to reach servers on your local network. For example, you might want to make a local web server, FTP server, or game server visible and available to the Internet. Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure the router to forward specific incoming protocols to computers on your local network. In addition to servers for specific applications, you can also specify a default DMZ server to which all other incoming protocols are forwarded. Before starting, you need to determine which type of service, application, or game you want to provide, and the local IP address of the computer that will provide the service. The server computer has to always have the same IP address. To set up port forwarding:

Tip: To ensure that your server computer always has the same IP address, use the reserved IP address feature of your N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router. Advanced Settings 96 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 1. Select Advanced Setup > Port Forwarding/Port Triggering to display the following screen:

Port Forwarding is selected as the service type. 2. From the Service Name list, select the service or game that you will host on your network. If the service does not appear in the list, see Add a Custom Service on page In the corresponding Server IP Address field, enter the last digit of the IP address of your local computer that will provide this service. 97. 3. 4. Click Add. The service appears in the list in the screen. Add a Custom Service To define a service, game, or application that does not appear in the Service Name list, you have to first determine which port number or range of numbers is used by the application. You can usually determine this information by contacting the publisher of the application or user groups or newsgroups. To add a custom service:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Port Forwarding/Port Triggering. 2. Select Port Forwarding as the service type. Advanced Settings 97 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 3. Click the Add Custom Service button to display the following screen:

4. 5. 6. 7. In the Service Name field, enter a descriptive name. In the Protocol list, select the protocol. If you are unsure, select TCP/UDP. In the Starting Port field, enter the beginning port number. If the application uses a single port, enter the same port number in the Ending Port field. If the application uses a range of ports, enter the ending port number of the range in the Ending Port field. In the Server IP Address field, enter the IP address of your local computer that will provide this service. 8. Click Apply. The service appears in the list in the Port Forwarding/Port Triggering screen. Editing or Deleting a Port Forwarding Entry To edit or delete a port forwarding entry:

In the table, select the radio button next to the service name. 1. 2. Click Edit Service or Delete Service. Application Example: Making a Local Web Server Public If you host a web server on your local network, you can use port forwarding to allow web requests from anyone on the Internet to reach your web server. To make a local web server public:

1. Assign your web server either a fixed IP address or a dynamic IP address using DHCP address reservation. In this example, your router will always give your web server an IP address of 192.168.1.33. Advanced Settings 98 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 2. 3. In the Port Forwarding screen, configure the router to forward the HTTP service to the local address of your web server at 192.168.1.33. HTTP (port 80) is the standard protocol for web servers.

(Optional) Register a host name with a Dynamic DNS service, and configure your router to use the name as described in Dynamic DNS on page 101. To access your web server from the Internet, a remote user has to know the IP address that has been assigned by your ISP. However, if you use a Dynamic DNS service, the remote user can reach your server by a user-friendly Internet name, such as mynetgear.dyndns.org. Set Up Port Triggering Port triggering is a dynamic extension of port forwarding that is useful in these cases:

More than one local computer needs port forwarding for the same application (but not simultaneously). An application needs to open incoming ports that are different from the outgoing port. When port triggering is enabled, the router monitors outbound traffic looking for a specified outbound trigger port. When the router detects outbound traffic on that port, it remembers the IP address of the local computer that sent the data. The router then temporarily opens the specified incoming port or ports, and forwards incoming traffic on the triggered ports to the triggering computer. While port forwarding creates a static mapping of a port number or range to a single local computer, port triggering can dynamically open ports to any computer that needs them and can close the ports when they are no longer needed. Note: If you use applications such as multiplayer gaming, peer-to-peer connections, real-time communications such as instant messaging, or remote assistance (a feature in Windows XP), you should also enable Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) according to the instructions in Universal Plug and Play on page 106. To set up port triggering, you need to know which inbound ports the application needs. Also, you need to know the number of the outbound port that will trigger the opening of the inbound ports. You can usually determine this information by contacting the publisher of the application or user groups or newsgroups. To set up port triggering:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Port Forwarding/Port Triggering. Advanced Settings 99 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 2. Select the Port Triggering radio button to display the port triggering information. 3. Clear the Disable Port Triggering check box if it is selected. If the Disable Port Triggering check box is selected after you configure Note:

port triggering, port triggering is disabled. However, any port triggering configuration information you added to the router is retained even though it is not used. In the Port Triggering Timeout field, enter a value up to 9999 minutes. 4. 5. This value controls the inactivity timer for the designated inbound ports. The inbound ports close when the inactivity time expires. This is required because the router cannot be sure when the application has terminated. Advanced Settings 100 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 6. Click Add Service to display the following screen:

7. 8. In the Service Name field, type a descriptive service name. In the Service User list, select Any (the default) to allow this service to be used by any computer on the Internet. Otherwise, select Single address, and enter the IP address of one computer to restrict the service to a particular computer. 9. Select the service type, either TCP or UDP or both (TCP/UDP). If you are not sure, select TCP/UDP. 10. In the Triggering Port field, enter the number of the outbound traffic port that will cause the inbound ports to be opened. 11. Enter the inbound connection port information in the Connection Type, Starting Port, and Ending Port fields. 12. Click Apply. The service appears in the Port Triggering Portmap table. Dynamic DNS If your Internet service provider (ISP) gave you a permanently assigned IP address, you can register a domain name and have that name linked with your IP address by public Domain Name Servers (DNS). However, if your Internet account uses a dynamically assigned IP address, you do not know in advance what your IP address will be, and the address can change frequently. In this case, you can use a commercial Dynamic DNS service. This type of service lets you register your domain to their IP address and forwards traffic directed at your domain to your frequently changing IP address. If your ISP assigns a private WAN IP address (such as 192.168.x.x or 10.x.x.x), the Dynamic DNS service will not work because private addresses are not routed on the Internet. Your router contains a client that can connect to the Dynamic DNS service provided by DynDNS.org. First visit their website at http://www.dyndns.org and obtain an account and Advanced Settings 101 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 host name that you configure in the router. Then, whenever your ISP-assigned IP address changes, your router automatically contacts the Dynamic DNS service provider, logs in to your account, and registers your new IP address. If your host name is hostname, for example, you can reach your router at http://hostname.dyndns.org. On the Advanced tab, select Advanced Setup > Dynamic DNS to display the following screen:

Figure 9. Forward traffic to a changing IP address To set up Dynamic DNS:

1. Register for an account with one of the Dynamic DNS service providers whose names appear in the Service Provider list. For example, for DynDNS.org, select www.dyndns.org. 2. Select the Use a Dynamic DNS Service check box. 3. Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. 4. Type the host name (or domain name) that your Dynamic DNS service provider gave you. 5. Type the user name for your Dynamic DNS account. This is the name that you use to log in to your account, not your host name. 6. Type the password (or key) for your Dynamic DNS account. 7. If your Dynamic DNS provider allows the use of wildcards in resolving your URL, you can select the Use Wildcards check box to activate this feature. For example, the wildcard feature causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. 8. Click Apply to save your configuration. Advanced Settings 102 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Static Routes Static routes provide additional routing information to your router. Under usual circumstances, the router has adequate routing information after it has been configured for Internet access, and you do not need to configure additional static routes. You have to configure static routes only for unusual cases such as multiple routers or multiple IP subnets located on your network. As an example of when a static route is needed, consider the following case:

Your primary Internet access is through a cable modem to an ISP. You have an ISDN router on your home network for connecting to the company where you are employed. This routers address on your LAN is 192.168.1.100. Your companys network address is 134.177.0.0. When you first configured your router, two implicit static routes were created. A default route was created with your ISP as the gateway, and a second static route was created to your local network for all 192.168.1.x addresses. With this configuration, if you attempt to access a device on the 134.177.0.0 network, your router forwards your request to the ISP. The ISP forwards your request to the company where you are employed, and the request is likely to be denied by the companys firewall. In this case you have to define a static route, telling your router that 134.177.0.0 should be accessed through the ISDN router at 192.168.1.100. In this example:

The Destination IP Address and IP Subnet Mask fields specify that this static route applies to all 134.177.x.x addresses. The Gateway IP Address field specifies that all traffic for these addresses should be forwarded to the ISDN router at 192.168.1.100. A metric value of 1 will work since the ISDN router is on the LAN. Private is selected only as a precautionary security measure in case RIP is activated. Advanced Settings 103 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To set up a static route:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Static Routes, and click Add to display the following screen:

In the Route Name field, type a name for this static route (for identification purposes only.) 2. 3. Select the Private check box if you want to limit access to the LAN only. If Private is selected, the static route is not reported in RIP. 4. Select the Active check box to make this route effective. 5. Type the destination IP address of the final destination. 6. Type the IP subnet mask for this destination. If the destination is a single host, type 255.255.255.255. 7. Type the gateway IP address, which has to be a router on the same LAN segment as the N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router. 8. Type a number between 1 and 15 as the metric value. This value represents the number of routers between your network and the destination. Usually, a setting of 2 or 3 works, but if this is a direct connection, set it to 1. 9. Click Apply to add the static route. Advanced Settings 104 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Remote Management The remote management feature lets you upgrade or check the status of your N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router over the Internet. To set up remote management:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > Remote Management. Be sure to change the routers default login password to a very secure Note:

password. The ideal password should contain no dictionary words from any language and contain uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols. It can be up to 30 characters. 2. Select the Turn Remote Management On check box. 3. Under Allow Remote Access By, specify the external IP addresses to be allowed to access the routers remote management. For enhanced security, restrict access to as few external IP addresses Note:

as practical. To allow access from a single IP address on the Internet, select Only This Computer. Enter the IP address that will be allowed access. To allow access from a range of IP addresses on the Internet, select IP Address Range. Enter a beginning and ending IP address to define the allowed range. To allow access from any IP address on the Internet, select Everyone. 4. Specify the port number for accessing the management interface. Advanced Settings 105 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Normal web browser access uses the standard HTTP service port 80. For greater security, enter a custom port number for the remote web management nterface. Choose a number between 1024 and 65535, but do not use the number of any common service port. The default is 8080, which is a common alternate for HTTP. 5. Click Apply to have your changes take effect. 6. When accessing your router from the Internet, type your routers WAN IP address into your browsers address or location field followed by a colon (:) and the custom port number. For example, if your external address is 134.177.0.123 and you use port number 8080, enter http://134.177.0.123:8080 in your browser. USB Settings For added security, the router can be set up to share only approved USB devices. See Specify Approved USB Devices on page 50 for the procedure. Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) helps devices, such as Internet appliances and computers, to access the network and connect to other devices as needed. UPnP devices can automatically discover the services from other registered UPnP devices on the network. Note: If you use applications such as multiplayer gaming, peer-to-peer connections, or real-time communications such as instant messaging or remote assistance (a feature in Windows XP), you should enable UPnP. Advanced Settings 106 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 To turn on Universal Plug and Play:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > UPnP. The UPnP screen displays. 2. The available settings and information in this screen are:

Turn UPnP On. UPnP can be enabled or disabled for automatic device configuration. The default setting for UPnP is disabled. If this check box is not selected, the router does not allow any device to automatically control the resources, such as port forwarding

(mapping) of the router. Advertisement Period. The advertisement period is how often the router broadcasts its UPnP information. This value can range from 1 to 1440 minutes. The default period is 30 minutes. Shorter durations ensure that control points have current device status at the expense of additional network traffic. Longer durations can compromise the freshness of the device status, but can significantly reduce network traffic. Advertisement Time to Live. The time to live for the advertisement is measured in hops

(steps) for each UPnP packet sent. The time to live hop count is the number of steps a broadcast packet is allowed to propagate for each UPnP advertisement before it disappears. The number of hops can range from 1 to 255. The default value for the advertisement time to live is 4 hops, which should be fine for most home networks. If you notice that some devices are not being updated or reached correctly, then it might be necessary to increase this value. UPnP Portmap Table. The UPnP Portmap Table displays the IP address of each UPnP device that is currently accessing the router and which ports (internal and external) that device has opened. The UPnP Portmap Table also displays what type of port is open and whether that port is still active for each IP address. 3. Click Apply to save your settings. Advanced Settings 107 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 IPv6 You can use this feature to set up an IPv6 Internet connection type if NETGEAR genie does not detect it automatically. To set up an IPv6 Internet connection type:

1. Select Advanced > Advanced Setup > IPv6 to display the following screen:

2. Select the IPv6 connection type from the list. Your Internet service provider (ISP) can provide this information. If your ISP did not provide details, you can select IPv6 Tunnel. If you are not sure, select Auto Detect so that the router detects the IPv6 type that is in use. If your Internet connection does not use PPPoE, DHCP, or fixed, but is IPv6, then select IPv6 auto config. 3. Click Apply so that your changes take effect. Advanced Settings 108 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Traffic Meter Traffic metering allows you to monitor the volume of Internet traffic passing through your routers Internet port. With the Traffic Meter utility, you can set limits for traffic volume, set a monthly limit, and get a live update of traffic usage. To monitor Internet traffic:

1. Click Advanced > Advanced Setup > Traffic Meter to display the following screen:

Scroll to view more settings 2. To enable the Traffic Meter, select the Enable Traffic Meter check box. 3. If you would like to record and restrict the volume of Internet traffic, select the Traffic volume control by radio button. You can select one of the following options for controlling the traffic volume:

No Limit. No restriction is applied when the traffic limit is reached. Download only. The restriction is applied to incoming traffic only. Both Directions. The restriction is applied to both incoming and outgoing traffic. 4. You can limit the amount of data traffic allowed per month by specifying how many Mbytes per month are allowed or by specifying how many hours of traffic are allowed. 5. Set the Traffic Counter to begin at a specific time and date. 6. Set up Traffic Control to issue a warning message before the monthly limit of Mbytes or hours is reached. You can select one of the following to occur when the limit is attained:

The Internet LED flashes green or amber. The Internet connection is disconnected and disabled. 7. Set up Internet Traffic Statistics to monitor the data traffic. 8. Click the Traffic Status button to get a live update on Internet traffic status on your router. 9. Click Apply to save your settings. Advanced Settings 109 10. Troubleshooting 10 This chapter provides information to help you diagnose and solve problems you might have with your router. If you do not find the solution here, check the NETGEAR support site at http://support.netgear.com for product and contact information. This chapter contains the following sections:

Troubleshooting with the LEDs Quick Tips Cannot Log In to the Router Cannot Access the Internet Changes Not Saved Wireless Connectivity Restore the Factory Settings and Password Troubleshoot Your Network Using the Ping Utility 110 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Quick Tips This section describes tips for troubleshooting some common problems Sequence to Restart Your Network Be sure to restart your network in this sequence:

1. Turn off and unplug the modem. 2. Turn off the router and computers. 3. Plug in the modem and turn it on. Wait 2 minutes. 4. Turn on the router and wait 2 minutes. 5. Turn on the computers. Check Ethernet Cable Connections Make sure that the Ethernet cables are securely plugged in. The Internet LED on the router is on if the Ethernet cable connecting the router and the modem is plugged in securely and the modem and router are turned on. For each powered-on computer connected to the router by an Ethernet cable, the corresponding numbered router LAN port LED is on. Wireless Settings Make sure that the wireless settings in the computer and router match exactly. For a wirelessly connected computer, the wireless network name (SSID) and wireless security settings of the router and wireless computer need to match exactly. If you set up an access list in the Advanced Wireless Settings screen, you have to add each wireless computers MAC address to the routers access list. Network Settings Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct. Wired and wirelessly connected computers need to have network (IP) addresses on the same network as the router. The simplest way to do this is to configure each computer to obtain an IP address automatically using DHCP. Some cable modem service providers require you to use the MAC address of the computer initially registered on the account. You can view the MAC address in the Attached Devices screen. Troubleshooting 111 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Troubleshooting with the LEDs After you turn on power to the router, the following sequence of events should occur:

1. When power is first applied, verify that the Power/Test LED 2. Verify that the Power/Test LED turns amber within a few seconds, indicating that the self-test is on. is running. 3. After approximately 30 seconds, verify that:

The Power/Test LED is solid green. The Internet LED is on. A numbered Ethernet port LED is on for any local port that is connected to a computer. This indicates that a link has been established to the connected device. The LEDs on the front panel of the router can be used for troubleshooting. Power/Test LED Is Off or Blinking Make sure that the power cord is securely connected to your router and that the power adapter is securely connected to a functioning power outlet. Check that you are using the 12V DC, 2.5A power adapter that NETGEAR supplied for this product. If the Power/Test LED blinks slowly and continuously, the router firmware is corrupted. This can happen if a firmware upgrade is interrupted, or if the router detects a problem with the firmware. If the error persists, you have a hardware problem. For recovery instructions, or help with a hardware problem, contact technical support at www.netgear.com/support. Power/Test LED Stays Amber When the router is turned on, the Power/Test LED turns amber for about 20 seconds and then turns green. If the LED does not turn green, the router has a problem. If the Power/Test LED is still amber 1 minute after you turn on power to the router:

1. Turn the power off and back on to see if the router recovers. 2. Press and hold the Reset button to return the router to its factory settings. as explained in Restore the Factory Settings and Password on page 117. If the error persists, you might have a hardware problem and should contact technical support at www.netgear.com/support. Troubleshooting 112 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 LEDs Never Turn Off When the router is turned on, the LEDs turn on for about 10 seconds and then turn off. If all the LEDs stay on, there is a fault within the router. If all LEDs are still on 1 minute after power-up:

Cycle the power to see if the router recovers. Press and hold the Reset button to return the router to its factory settings as explained in Restore the Factory Settings and Password on page 117. If the error persists, you might have a hardware problem and should contact technical support at www.netgear.com/support. Internet or Ethernet Port LEDs Are Off If either the Ethernet port LEDs or the Internet LED does not light when the Ethernet connection is made, check the following:

Make sure that the Ethernet cable connections are secure at the router and at the modem or computer. Make sure that power is turned on to the connected modem or computer. Be sure that you are using the correct cable:

When connecting the routers Internet port to a cable or DSL modem, use the cable that was supplied with the cable or DSL modem. This cable could be a standard straight-through Ethernet cable or an Ethernet crossover cable. Wireless LEDs Are Off If the Wireless LEDs stay off, check to see if the Wireless On/Off button on the router has been pressed. This button turns the wireless radios in the router on and off. The Wireless LEDs are lit when the wireless radio is turned on. The Push 'N' Connect (WPS) Button Blinks Amber If after using the WPS function the button blinks amber, check the following:

Make sure that you are using the button and not the routers built-in registrar. Check that PIN verification has succeeded for the wireless device you are adding to the wireless network. Make sure you have not pressed the WPS button on the side of the router after disabling the WPS feature (you logged in to the router and disabled this previously). Check that the router is not in the temporary AP setup locked state (if you are using the wireless repeater function). Troubleshooting 113 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Cannot Log In to the Router If you are unable to log in to the router from a computer on your local network, check the following:

If you are using an Ethernet-connected computer, check the Ethernet connection between the computer and the router as described in the previous section. Make sure that your computers IP address is on the same subnet as the router. If you are using the recommended addressing scheme, your computers address should be in the range of 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.254. If your computers IP address is shown as 169.254.x.x, recent versions of Windows and MacOS generate and assign an IP address if the computer cannot reach a DHCP server. These auto-generated addresses are in the range of 169.254.x.x. If your IP address is in this range, check the connection from the computer to the router, and reboot your computer. If your routers IP address was changed and you do not know the current IP address, clear the routers configuration to factory defaults. This sets the routers IP address to 192.168.1.1. This procedure is explained in Factory Settings on page 120. Make sure that your browser has Java, JavaScript, or ActiveX enabled. If you are using Internet Explorer, click Refresh to be sure that the Java applet is loaded. Try quitting the browser and launching it again. Make sure that you are using the correct login information. The factory default login name is admin, and the password is password. Make sure that Caps Lock is off when you enter this information. If you are attempting to set up your NETGEAR router as an additional router behind an existing router in your network, consider replacing the existing router instead. NETGEAR does not support such a configuration. If you are attempting to set up your NETGEAR router as a replacement for an ADSL gateway in your network, the router cannot perform many gateway services, for example, converting ADSL or cable data into Ethernet networking information. NETGEAR does not support such a configuration. Cannot Access the Internet If you can access your router but you are unable to access the Internet, first determine whether the router can obtain an IP address from your Internet service provider (ISP). Unless your ISP provides a fixed IP address, your router requests an IP address from the ISP. You can determine whether the request was successful using the Router Status screen. To check the WAN IP address:

1. Start your browser, and select an external site such as www.netgear.com. 2. Access the router interface at www.routerlogin.net. 3. Select Adminstration > Router Status. Troubleshooting 114 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 4. Check that an IP address is shown for the Internet port. If 0.0.0.0 is shown, your router has not obtained an IP address from your ISP. If your router cannot obtain an IP address from the ISP, you might need to force your cable or DSL modem to recognize your new router by restarting your network, as described in Sequence to Restart Your Network on page If your router is still unable to obtain an IP address from the ISP, the problem might be one of the following:

Your Internet service provider (ISP) might require a login program. 111. Ask your ISP whether they require PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) or some other type of login. If your ISP requires a login, the login name and password might be set incorrectly. Your ISP might check for your computers host name. Assign the computer host name of your ISP account as the account name in the Internet Setup screen. Your ISP allows only one Ethernet MAC address to connect to Internet and might check for your computers MAC address. In this case, do one of the following:

-

Inform your ISP that you have bought a new network device, and ask them to use the routers MAC address.

- Configure your router to clone your computers MAC address. If your router can obtain an IP address, but your computer is unable to load any web pages from the Internet:

Your computer might not recognize any DNS server addresses. A DNS server is a host on the Internet that translates Internet names (such as www addresses) to numeric IP addresses. Typically, your ISP provides the addresses of one or two DNS servers for your use. If you entered a DNS address during the routers configuration, reboot your computer, and verify the DNS address.You can configure your computer manually with DNS addresses, as explained in your operating system documentation. Your computer might not have the router configured as its TCP/IP gateway. If your computer obtains its information from the router by DHCP, reboot the computer, and verify the gateway address. You might be running login software that is no longer needed. If your ISP provided a program to log you in to the Internet (such as WinPoET), you no longer need to run that software after installing your router. You might need to go to Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options, click the Connections tab, and select Never dial a connection. Troubleshooting 115 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Troubleshooting PPPoE If you are using PPPoE, try troubleshooting your Internet connection. To troubleshoot a PPPoE connection:

1. Log in to the router. 2. Select Administration > Router Status. 3. Click Connection Status. If all of the steps indicate OK, then your PPPoE connection is up and working. If any of the steps indicate Failed, you can attempt to reconnect by clicking Connect. The router continues to attempt to connect indefinitely. If you cannot connect after several minutes, you might be using an incorrect service name, user name, or password. There also might be a provisioning problem with your ISP. Note: Unless you connect manually, the router does not authenticate using PPPoE until data is transmitted to the network. Troubleshooting Internet Browsing If your router can obtain an IP address but your computer is unable to load any web pages from the Internet, check the following:

Your computer might not recognize any DNS server addresses. A DNS server is a host on the Internet that translates Internet names (such as www addresses) to numeric IP addresses. Typically, your ISP provides the addresses of one or two DNS servers for your use. If you entered a DNS address during the routers configuration, restart your computer. Alternatively, you can configure your computer manually with a DNS address, as explained in the documentation for your computer. Your computer might not have the router configured as its default gateway. Reboot the computer and verify that the router address (www.routerlogin.net) is listed by your computer as the default gateway address. You might be running log in software that is no longer needed. If your ISP provided a program to log you in to the Internet (such as WinPoET), you no longer need to run that software after installing your router. You might need to go to Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options, click the Connections tab, and select Never dial a connection. Troubleshooting 116 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Changes Not Saved If the router does not save the changes you make in the router interface, check the following:

When entering configuration settings, always click the Apply button before moving to another screen or tab, or your changes are lost. Click the Refresh or Reload button in the web browser. The changes might have occurred, but the old settings might be in the web browsers cache. Wireless Connectivity If you are having trouble connecting wirelessly to the router, try to isolate the problem. Does the wireless device or computer that you are using find your wireless network?

If not, check the Wireless LEDs on the front of the router. It should be lit. If it is not, you can press the WiFi On/Off button on the back of the router to turn the routers wireless radio back on. If you disabled the routers SSID broadcast, then your wireless network is hidden and does not show up in your wireless clients scanning list. (By default, SSID broadcast is enabled.) Does your wireless device support the security that you are using for your wireless network (WPA or WPA2)?

If you want to view the wireless settings for the router, use an Ethernet cable to connect a computer to a LAN port on the router. Then log in to the router, and select Wireless see

(Basic Wireless Settings on page 23). Note:

Be sure to click Apply if you make changes. Wireless Signal Strength If your wireless device finds your network, but the signal strength is weak, check these conditions:

Is your router too far from your computer, or too close? Place your computer near the router, but at least 6 feet away, and see whether the signal strength improves. Is your wireless signal blocked by objects between the router and your computer?

Restore the Factory Settings and Password This section explains how to restore the factory settings, changing the routers administration password back to password. You can erase the current configuration and restore factory defaults in two ways:

Use the Erase function of the router (see Erase on page 78). Troubleshooting 117 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Use the Reset button on the back of the router. See Factory Settings on page 120. If you restore the factory settings and the router fails to restart, or the green Power/Test LED continues to blink, the unit might be defective. If the error persists, you might have a hardware problem and should contact technical support at http://www.netgear.com/support. Troubleshoot Your Network Using the Ping Utility Most network devices and routers contain a ping utility that sends an echo request packet to the designated device. The device then responds with an echo reply. Troubleshooting a network is made very easy by using the ping utility in your computer or workstation. Test the LAN Path to Your Router You can ping the router from your computer to verify that the LAN path to your router is set up correctly. To ping the router from a running Windows PC:

1. From the Windows toolbar, click Start, and then select Run. 2. In the field provided, type ping followed by the IP address of the router, as in this example:

ping www.routerlogin.net 3. Click OK. You should see a message like this one:

Pinging <IP address > with 32 bytes of data If the path is working, you see this message:

Reply from < IP address >: bytes=32 time=NN ms TTL=xxx If the path is not working, you see this message:

Request timed out If the path is not functioning correctly, you could have one of the following problems:

Wrong physical connections For a wired connection, make sure that the numbered LAN port LED is on for the port to which you are connected. Check that the appropriate LEDs are on for your network devices. If your router and computer are connected to a separate Ethernet switch, make sure that the link LEDs are on for the switch ports that are connected to your computer and router. Wrong network configuration Verify that the Ethernet card driver software and TCP/IP software are both installed and configured on your computer. Troubleshooting 118 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Verify that the IP address for your router and your computer are correct and that the addresses are on the same subnet. Test the Path from Your Computer to a Remote Device After verifying that the LAN path works correctly, test the path from your computer to a remote device. 1. From the Windows toolbar, click the Start button, and then select Run. 2. In the Windows Run window, type:

ping -n 10 <IP address>

where <IP address> is the IP address of a remote device such as your ISPs DNS server. If the path is functioning correctly, replies like those shown in the previous section are displayed. If you do not receive replies:

Check that your computer has the IP address of your router listed as the default gateway. If the IP configuration of your computer is assigned by DHCP, this information is not be visible in your computers Network Control Panel. Verify that the IP address of the router is listed as the default gateway. Check to see that the network address of your computer (the portion of the IP address specified by the subnet mask) is different from the network address of the remote device. Check that your cable or DSL modem is connected and functioning. If your ISP assigned a host name to your computer, enter that host name as the account name in the Internet Setup screen. Your ISP could be rejecting the Ethernet MAC addresses of all but one of your computers. Many broadband ISPs restrict access by allowing traffic only from the MAC address of your broadband modem, but some ISPs additionally restrict access to the MAC address of a single computer connected to that modem. If this is the case, configure your router to clone or spoof the MAC address from the authorized computer. Troubleshooting 119 A. Supplemental Information A This appendix provides factory default settings and technical specifications for the N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2. Factory Settings You can return the router to its factory settings. Use the end of a paper clip or some other similar object to press and hold the Reset button on the back of the router for at least 7 seconds. The router resets, and returns to the factory configuration settings shown in the following table. Table 4. Factory default settings Feature Default behavior Router login User login URL www.routerlogin.com or www.routerlogin.net Internet connection Local network

(LAN) User name (case-sensitive) admin Login password (case-sensitive) password WAN MAC address Use default hardware address WAN MTU size Port speed LAN IP Subnet mask DHCP server DHCP range Time zone 1500 Autosensing 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 Enabled 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.254 Pacific time Time zone daylight savings time Disabled Allow a registrar to configure this router Enabled 120 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Table 4. Factory default settings (continued) Feature Local network

(LAN) continued Default behavior DHCP starting IP address 192.168.1.2 DHCP ending IP address 192.168.1.254 DMZ Time zone Disabled GMT for WW except NA and GR, GMT+1 for GR, GMT-8 for NA Time zone adjusted for daylight savings time SNMP Disabled Disabled Firewall Inbound (communications coming in from the Internet) Disabled (except traffic on port 80, the HTTP port) Outbound (communications going out to the Internet) Enabled (all) Source MAC filtering Wireless Wireless communication SSID name Security Broadcast SSID Transmission speed Country/region RF channel Operating mode Data rate Output power Disabled Enabled See router label WPA2-PSK (AES) Enabled Auto*

United States in the US; otherwise varies by region 6 until region selected Up to 450 Mbps Best Full Firewall Inbound (communications coming in from the Internet) Disabled (bars all unsolicited requests) Outbound (communications going out to the Internet) Enabled (all)

*. Maximum wireless signal rate derived from IEEE Standard 802.11 specifications. Actual throughput will vary. Network conditions and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, building materials and construction, and network overhead, lower actual data throughput rate. Supplemental Information 121 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Technical Specifications Table 5. WNDR4500v2 Router specifications Feature Description Data and routing protocols TCP/IP, RIP-1, RIP-2, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP, Dynamic DNS, UPnP, and SMB Power adapter Dimensions Weight North America: 120V, 60 Hz, input UK, Australia: 240V, 50 Hz, input Europe: 230V, 50 Hz, input

All regions (output): 12V DC @ 2.5A, output 8.8 in. x 6.8 in. x 1.2 in. (223 x 153 x 31 mm) 1.2 lbs. (0.5 kg) Operating temperature 0 to 40 C

(32 to 104 F) Operating humidity 10% to 90% relative humidity, noncondensing Electromagnetic Emissions FCC Part 15 Class B LAN WAN Wireless EN 55 022 (CISPR 22), Class B C-Tick N10947 10BASE-T or 100BASE-Tx or 1000BASE-T, RJ-45 10BASE-T or 100BASE-Tx or 1000BASE-T, RJ-45 Maximum wireless signal rate complies with the IEEE 802.11 standard. See the footnote for the previous table. Radio data rates Auto Rate Sensing Data encoding standards IEEE 802.11n version 2.0 IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b 2.4 GHz IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11a 5.0 GHz Maximum computers per wireless network Limited by the amount of wireless network traffic generated by each node

(typically 5070 nodes). Supplemental Information 122 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Table 5. WNDR4500v2 Router specifications (continued) Feature Description Operating frequency range 2.4 GHz 2.4122.462 GHz (US) 2.4122.472 GHz (Europe ETSI) 5 GHz 5.185.24 + 5.7455.825 GHz (US) 5.185.24 GHz (Europe ETSI) 802.11 security WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, and WPA/WPA2 Supplemental Information 123 B. Notification of Compliance NETGEAR Dual Band - Wireless B Regulatory Compliance Information This section includes user requirements for operating this product in accordance with National laws for usage of radio spectrum and operation of radio devices. Failure of the end-user to comply with the applicable requirements may result in unlawful operation and adverse action against the end-user by the applicable National regulatory authority. Note: Note: This product's firmware limits operation to only the channels allowed in a particular Region or Country. Therefore, all options described in this user's guide may not be available in your version of the product. Europe - EU Declaration of Conformity Marking by the above symbol indicates compliance with the Essential Requirements of the R&TTE Directive of the European Union (1999/5/EC). This equipment meets the following conformance standards:

EN300 328 (2.4Ghz), EN301 489-17, EN301 893 (5Ghz), EN60950-1 For complete DoC, visit the NETGEAR EU Declarations of Conformity website at:

http://support.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621/

EDOC in Languages of the European Community Language Statement Cesky [Czech]

NETGEAR Inc. tmto prohlauje, e tento Radiolan je ve shode se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi prslunmi ustanovenmi smernice 1999/5/ES. Dansk [Danish]

Undertegnede NETGEAR Inc. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Radiolan overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch

[German]

Hiermit erklrt NETGEAR Inc., dass sich das Gert Radiolan in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Eesti [Estonian]

Kesolevaga kinnitab NETGEAR Inc. seadme Radiolan vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. English Hereby, NETGEAR Inc., declares that this Radiolan is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. 124 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Espaol [Spanish] Por medio de la presente NETGEAR Inc. declara que el Radiolan cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

[Greek] NETGEAR Inc. Radiolan 1999/5/. Franais [French] Par la prsente NETGEAR Inc. dclare que l'appareil Radiolan est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Italiano [Italian]

Con la presente NETGEAR Inc. dichiara che questo Radiolan conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski [Latvian] Ar o NETGEAR Inc. deklar, ka Radiolan atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi

[Lithuanian]

Nederlands

[Dutch]

iuo NETGEAR Inc. deklaruoja, kad is Radiolan atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart NETGEAR Inc. dat het toestel Radiolan in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Malti [Maltese]

Hawnhekk, NETGEAR Inc., jiddikjara li dan Radiolan jikkonforma mal-htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Magyar

[Hungarian]

Alulrott, NETGEAR Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Radiolan megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Polski [Polish]

Niniejszym NETGEAR Inc. owiadcza, e Radiolan jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Portugus

[Portuguese]

NETGEAR Inc. declara que este Radiolan est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Slovensko

[Slovenian]

Slovensky

[Slovak]

NETGEAR Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Radiolan v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. NETGEAR Inc. tmto vyhlasuje, e Radiolan spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Suomi [Finnish]

NETGEAR Inc. vakuuttaa tten ett Radiolan tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska

[Swedish]

Hrmed intygar NETGEAR Inc. att denna Radiolan str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Notification of Compliance 125 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 slenska

[Icelandic]

Hr me lsir NETGEAR Inc. yfir v a Radiolan er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Norsk

[Norwegian]

NETGEAR Inc. erklrer herved at utstyret Radiolan er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. This device is a 2.4 GHz wideband transmission system (transceiver), intended for use in all EU member states and EFTA countries, except in France and Italy where restrictive use applies. In Italy the end-user should apply for a license at the national spectrum authorities in order to obtain authorization to use the device for setting up outdoor radio links and/or for supplying public access to telecommunications and/or network services. This device may not be used for setting up outdoor radio links in France and in some areas the RF output power may be limited to 10 mW EIRP in the frequency range of 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. For detailed information the end-user should contact the national spectrum authority in France. FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States FCC Information to User This product does not contain any user serviceable components and is to be used with approved antennas only. Any product changes or modifications will invalidate all applicable regulatory certifications and approvals. FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC Declaration of Conformity We, NETGEAR, Inc., 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, CA 95134, declare under our sole responsibility that the N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 complies with Part 15 Subpart B of FCC CFR47 Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Warnings & Instructions This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following methods:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an electrical outlet on a circuit different from that which the radio receiver is Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. connected. FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Notification of Compliance 126 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 For product available in the USA market, only channel 1~11 can be operated. Selection of other channels is not This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or possible. transmitter. Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus (N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2) does not exceed the Class B limits for radio-noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This Class [B] digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe [B] est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada Industry Canada This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT NOTE: Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Caution:

The device for the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce po-tential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. NOTE IMPORTANTE: Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Avertissement:

Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utili-sation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. Les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., qu'ils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. GPL License Agreement GPL may be included in this product; to view the GPL license agreement go to ftp://downloads.netgear.com/files/GPLnotice.pdf. For GNU General Public License (GPL) related information, please visit http://support.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/2649 . Notification of Compliance 127 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 Interference Reduction Table The table below shows the Recommended Minimum Distance between NETGEAR equipment and household appliances to reduce interference (in feet and meters). Household Appliance Microwave ovens Baby Monitor - Analog Baby Monitor - Digital Cordless phone - Analog Cordless phone - Digital Bluetooth devices ZigBee Recommended Minimum Distance

(in feet and meters) 30 feet / 9 meters 20 feet / 6 meters 40 feet / 12 meters 20 feet / 6 meters 30 feet / 9 meters 20 feet / 6 meters 20 feet / 6 meters Notification of Compliance 128 Index A access remote 105 viewing logs 75 access points 88 accessing remote computer 92 adding custom service 97 priority rules 39 address reservation 37 advertisement period 107 alerts, emailing 68 applications, QoS for online gaming 39 approved USB devices 50 attached devices 21 authentication, required by mail server 68 automatic firmware checking 70 automatic Internet connection 29 B back panel 11 backing up configuration 77 base station, setting up 90 blocking inbound traffic 92 keywords 64 services 65 sites 64 box contents 8 C cables, checking 111 changes not saved, router 117 compliance 124 configuration file 77 configuring DMZ server 33 Dynamic DNS 102 NAT 32 port forwarding 96 port triggering 99 QoS 38 repeater unit 91 user-defined services 65 connecting wirelessly 8 country setting 29 crossover cable 113 CTS/RTS Threshold 87 custom service (port forwarding) 97 D dashboard 16 data packets, fragmented 33 default DMZ server 33 default factory settings, list of 120 default factory settings, restoring 78, 117 default gateway 73 deleting configuration 78 keywords 64 denial of service (DoS) protection 63 devices, attached 21 DHCP server 36, 73 DHCP setting 72 DMZ server 33 DNS addresses troubleshooting 115 DNS servers 92 Domain Name Server (DNS) addresses 20, 72 Dynamic DNS 101 DynDNS.org 101 E electromagnetic emissions 122 email notices 68 encryption keys 27 erasing configuration 78 Ethernet cables, checking 111 Ethernet LED, troubleshooting and 112, 113 129 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 F factory default settings, restoring 78, 117 factory settings list of 120 resetting 11 file sharing 44 firmware version 71 firmware, upgrading 15, 70 fragmentation length 87 fragmented data packets 33 front panel 9 G games, online, QoS for 39 gateway IP address 20 genie, NETGEAR 14 guest networks 26, 75 H host name 19 host, trusted 64 I inbound traffic, allowing or blocking 92 installing NETGEAR genie 14 installing with the Setup Wizard 29 Internet connection setting up 19 troubleshooting 114 Internet LED, troubleshooting and 112 Internet port 29, 71 Internet Relay Chat (IRC) 94 Internet service provider (ISP) account information 13 Internet Setup screen 19 login 13 Internet services, blocking access 65 Internet Setup screen 19 interval, poll 72 IP addresses current 71 DHCP 13 dynamic 101 reserved 37 IP subnet mask 72 K keywords 64 L label, product 11 LAN port QoS for 40 settings 71 LAN setup 35 language setting 29 large files, sharing 45 lease, DHCP 73 LEDs described 10 troubleshooting and 112 local servers, port forwarding to 96 logging in 13, 15 logs emailing 68 viewing 75 M MAC addresses current 71 product label 11 QoS for 41 mail server, outgoing 68 maintenance settings 69 managing router remotely 105 media server, setting the router to be a 50 menus, described 16 metric value 104 mixed mode security options 27 MTU size 33 multicasting 36 N NAT (Network Address Translation) 32, 33, 93 NETGEAR genie 14 network, how to restart 111 networks guest 75 networks, guest 26 networks, troubleshooting 111 O outgoing mail server 68 130 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 router interface, described 16 router status, viewing 71 P packets, fragmented 33 Parental Controls 22 passphrases changing 25 product label 11 password recovery, admin 79 password, restoring 117 photos, sharing 45 poll interval 72 port filtering 65 port forwarding 92, 94, 95, 96 port numbers 65 port status 72 port triggering 92, 93, 95, 99 ports,listed, back panel 11 positioning the router 8 Power LED, troubleshooting and 112 PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) 115 Preamble mode 87 preset security about 23 passphrase 25 pre-shared key 27 primary DNS addresses 20 printing files and photos 45 prioritizing traffic 38 Push N Connect 17 Q QoS (Quality of Service) 38 R radio, wireless 87 range of wireless connections 8 ReadySHARE access 44, 47 recovering admin password 79 releasing connection status 73 remote management 105 renewing connection status 73 repeater units 91 reserved IP adresses 37 reset button 120 restarting network 111 restoring configuration file 77 default factory settings 78, 117 S scheduling keyword and service blocking 67 secondary DNS 20 security 23 firewall settings 63 see also security options security options 27 security PIN 11, 30 sending logs by email 68 serial number, product label 11 services, blocking 65 settings, default. See default factory settings Setup Wizard 29 sharing files 44 sites, blocking 64 SMTP server 68 specifications,technical 120 SSID, described 25 static routes 103 status, router, viewing 71 subnet mask 72 system up time 72 T technical specifications 120 technical support 2 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 27 time to live, advertisement 107 time-out, port triggering 100 trademarks 2 traffic metering 109 troubleshooting 110 log in access 114 router changes not saved 117 trusted host 64 U Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) 106 up time, system 72 upgrading firmware 15, 70 USB advanced configuration 48 basic storage settings 46 drive requirements 44 file sharing 44 131 N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WNDR4500v2 ReadySHARE access 44, 47 remote computer connection 52 specifying approved devices 50 unmounting a USB drive 49 USB devices, approved 50 user-defined services 65 V viewing logs 75 router status 71 W WAN IP address, troubleshooting 114 WAN setup 32 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) 17, 30 devices, adding 17 wireless channel 25 wireless connection, troubleshooting 117 wireless connections 8 wireless devices,adding to the network 17 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) 88, 89 Wireless LED, troubleshooting and 113, 114 wireless mode 25 wireless network name (SSID) broadcast 25 described 25 product label 11 wireless network settings 25 wireless radio 87 wireless repeating 88, 89 base station 90 repeater unit 91 wireless security options 27 wireless settings 23, 75 checking for correct 111 SSID broadcast 25 WMM (Wi-Fi Multimedia) 38 WPA encryption 27 WPA2 encryption 27 WPA2-PSK encryption 27 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mixed mode 27 WPS button 17 WPS-PSK encryption 27 WPS-PSK+ WPA2-PSK encryption 27 132

 

 

Photographs of EUT Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 1 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 2 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 3 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 4 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 5 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 6 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 7 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 8 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 9 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 10 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 11 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 12 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 13 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 14 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 15 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012 Reporton No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 16 OF 16

: Oct. 31, 2012

 

 

Photographs of EUT Report No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 1 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 2 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 3 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 Adapter 1 Brand: NETGEAR Model: P030WF120B P/N: 332-10200-02 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 4 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 5 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 Adapter 2 Brand: NETGEAR Model: MU30-5120250-A1 P/N: 332-10234-01 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 6 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 7 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No: 292829 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 PAGE NUMBER ISSUED DATE

: 8 OF 8

: Oct. 31, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

Report No.: FR292829 Appendix C. Co-location FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: C1 of C3 Report No.: FR292829 1. Results of Radiated Emissions for Co-located Temperature Test Engineer Horizontal 26 Magic Lai Humidity 60%

Configurations 2.4G + 5G FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: C2 of C3 Vertial Report No.: FR292829 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: C3 of C3

 

 

NETGEAR, Inc. 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 Tel: +1 408 907 8000 / Fax: +1 408 907 8097 Confidential Letter Date: 2012/10/9 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Equipment Authorization Division 7345 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for FCC IDPY312300207 Gentlemen:

The form 731 and application have been electronically submitted and any attachments will be up loaded to your web site to be used in obtaining a grant of certification. Short-term Pursuant to DA 04-1705 of the Commissions pubic notice, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

2. Internal Photos 1. External Photos Permanent NETGEAR, Inc. requests that the material in the following files be withheld from public disclosure in accordance with Section 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, 47 C.F.R. 0.459, following grant of the application. 3. Test Setup photos 4. Users Manual 1. Block Diagram 2. Circuit Diagram 3. Operational Description Should you require any further information, please contact the undersigned. Thank you for your consideration in this matter. Note: The registered grantee contact is not available, John Ramones is signing for grantee contact. He/She can be reached at email: jramones@netgear.com. Sincerely, Applicants company name

: NETGEAR, Inc. Applicants company address

: 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 Signature

:

Job Title and Dept.

: Mark Gandler / Sr. Compliance Engineer Signed for Mark Gandler E-Mail Tel.

: mark.gandler@netgear.com

: +1 408 907 8000

 

 

NETGEAR, Inc. 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 Tel: +1 408 907 8000 / Fax: +1 408 907 8097 DoC Attestation Letter Date: 2012/10/9 We NETGEAR, Inc., as the grantee of this project (FCC ID: PY312300207 / Brand Name: NETGEAR / Model No.: WNDR4500v2), would like to declare that the composite portion categorized as computer peripheral has been authorized under the Declaration of Conformity procedures (Sproton report No.: FD292829, FCC Test Firm Registration No.: 187376). The final product shall consequently comply with the FCC rule applied for DoC Procedure. Regards, Note: The registered grantee contact is not available, John Ramones is signing for grantee contact. He/She can be reached at email: jramones@netgear.com. FCC Grantee contact person information. Applicants company name

: NETGEAR, Inc. Applicants company address

: 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 Signature

:

Job Title and Dept.

: Mark Gandler / Sr. Compliance Engineer Signed for Mark Gandler E-Mail Tel.

: mark.gandler@netgear.com

: +1 408 907 8000

 

 

Report No.: FR292829 Appendix B. Maximum Permissible Exposure FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: B1 of B3 1. Maximum Permissible Exposure 1.1. Applicable Standard Report No.: FR292829 Systems operating under the provisions of this section shall be operated in a manner that ensures that the public is not exposed to radio frequency energy levels in excess limit for maximum permissible exposure. In accordance with 47 CFR FCC Part 2 Subpart J, section 2.1091 this device has been defined as a mobile device whereby a distance of 0.25 m normally can be maintained between the user and the device.

(A) Limits for Occupational / Controlled Exposure Frequency Range

(MHz) Electric Field Strength (E) (V/m) Magnetic Field Strength (H) (A/m) Power Density (S)

(mW/ cm) Averaging Time

|E|,|H| or S

(minutes) 0.3-3.0 3.0-30 30-300 300-1500 1500-100,000 614 1842 / f 61.4 1.63 4.89 / f 0.163

(100)*

(900 / f)*

1.0 F/300 5 6 6 6 6 6

(B) Limits for General Population / Uncontrolled Exposure Frequency Range

(MHz) Electric Field Strength (E) (V/m) Magnetic Field Strength (H) (A/m) Power Density (S)

(mW/ cm) Averaging Time

|E|,|H| or S

(minutes) 0.3-1.34 1.34-30 30-300 300-1500 1500-100,000 614 824/f 27.5 1.63 2.19/f 0.073

(100)*

(180/f)*

0.2 F/1500 1.0 30 30 30 30 30 Note: f = frequency in MHz ; *Plane-wave equivalent power density 1.2. MPE Calculation Method E (V/m) GP 30 d Power Density: Pd (W/m) 2E 377 E Electric field (V/m) P Peak RF output power (W) G EUT Antenna numeric gain (numeric) d Separation distance between radiator and human body (m) The formula can be changed to Pd 30 377 d GP 2 From the peak EUT RF output power, the minimum mobile separation distance, d=20cm, as well as the gain of the used antenna, the RF power density can be obtained. FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: B2 of B3 1.3. Calculated Result and Limit For 5GHz UNII Band: (15.407) Antenna Type : Printed Antenna Max Conducted Power for IEEE 802.11n MCS8: 16.97 dBm Average Average Antenna Gain Antenna Gain Output Power Output Power

(dBm) 16.9724

(mW) 49.8013 Power Density

(S)

(mW/cm) 0.025953

(dBi)

(numeric) 4.18 2.6182 For 5GHz ISM Band: (15.247) Antenna Type : Printed Antenna Max Conducted Power for IEEE 802.11a : 25.85 dBm Directional Antenna Gain

(dBi) 4.18 Antenna Gain

(numeric) 2.6182 Average Average Power Density Output Power Output Power

(dBm) 25.8501

(mW) 384.6008

(S)

(mW/cm) 0.200429 For 2.4GHz Band:

Antenna Type : Printed Antenna Max Conducted Power for IEEE 802.11g : 28.40 dBm Directional Antenna Gain

(dBi) 3.52 Antenna Gain

(numeric) 2.2491 Average Average Power Density Output Power Output Power

(dBm) 28.3952

(mW) 691.0622

(S)

(mW/cm) 0.309362 Report No.: FR292829 Limit of Power Density (S)

(mW/cm) Test Result 1 Complies Limit of Power Density (S)

(mW/cm) Test Result 1 Complies Limit of Power Density (S)

(mW/cm) Test Result 1 Complies CONCULSION:

Both of the WLAN function and LTE function can transmit simultaneously, the formula of calculatedthe MPE is:

CPD1 / LPD1 + CPD2 / LPD2 + etc. < 1 CPD = Calculation power density LPD = Limit of power density Therefore, the worst-case situation is 0.200429 /1+ 0.309362 /1 = 0.509791, which isless than 1. This confirmed that the device comply with FCC 1.1310 MPE limit. FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: B3 of B3

 

 

NETGEAR, Inc. 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 Tel: +1 408 907 8000 / Fax: +1 408 907 8097 Power of Attorney Date: 2012/10/9 Dear Sir, I hereby have entrusted the following person to be a proxy regarding application for Type Certification. Sporton International Inc. Address Name Job Title e-mail

: No.8, Lane 724, Bo-ai St., Jhubei City, HsinChu County 302, Taiwan, R.O.C.

: Leo Huang

: Manager

: Leohuang@sporton.com.tw I am therefore responsible for the contents of the application. Brand name and model type of the specified radio equipment: NETGEAR / WNDR4500v2 FCC ID: PY312300207 Product name: N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note: The registered grantee contact is not available, John Ramones is signing for grantee contact. He/She can be reached at email: jramones@netgear.com. FCC Grantee contact person information. Applicants company name

: NETGEAR, Inc. Applicants company address

: 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 Signature

:

Job Title and Dept.

: Mark Gandler / Sr. Compliance Engineer Signed for Mark Gandler E-Mail Tel.

: mark.gandler@netgear.com

: +1 408 907 8000

 

 

Report No.: FR292829 Appendix A. Test Photos FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: 1 of 5 Report No.: FR292829 1. Photographs of Conducted Emissions Test Configuration FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: 2 of 5 Report No.: FR292829 2. Photographs of Radiated Emissions Test Configuration Test Configuration: 9kHz ~30MHz FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: 3 of 5 Test Configuration: 30MHz~1GHz Report No.: FR292829 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: 4 of 5 Test Configuration: Above 1GHz Report No.: FR292829 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No.

: 5 of 5

 

 

SPORTON International Inc. No. 52, Hwa Ya 1st Rd., Kwei-Shan Hsiang, TaoYuan Hsien, Taiwan, R.O.C. Ph: 886-3-327-3456 / FAX: 886-3-327-0973 / www.sporton.com.tw FCC RADIO TEST REPORT Applicants company NETGEAR, Inc. Applicant Address 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 FCC ID PY312300207 Manufacturers company Manufacturer Address Ambit Microsystems (Shanghai) Ltd. No. 1925, Nanle Road, Songjiang Export Processing Zone, Shanghai, China Product Name N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Brand Name Model Name Test Rule Part(s) Test Freq. Range Received Date Final Test Date NETGEAR WNDR4500v2 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart C 15.247 2400 ~ 2483.5MHz / 5725 ~ 5850MHz Sep. 04, 2012 Oct. 29, 2012 Submission Type Original Equipment Statement Test result included is only for the IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11b/g part and IEEE 802.11a (5725 ~ 5850MHz) of the product. The test result in this report refers exclusively to the presented test model / sample. Without written approval of SPORTON International Inc., the test report shall not be reproduced except in full. The measurements and test results shown in this test report were made in accordance with the procedures and found in compliance with the limit given in ANSI C63.10-2009 and 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart C and KDB558074 - 20120118 & KDB662911 D01-20121004. The test equipment used to perform the test is calibrated and traceable to NML/ROC. Report Format Version: 01 Report No.: FR292829AB Table of Contents 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. 1. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE.......................................................................................................................... 1 2. SUMMARY OF THE TEST RESULT........................................................................................................................... 2 3. GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................................... 3 Product Details ....................................................................................................................................................................................3 Accessories .........................................................................................................................................................................................6 Table for Filed Antenna .......................................................................................................................................................................7 Table for Carrier Frequencies...............................................................................................................................................................8 Table for Test Modes............................................................................................................................................................................9 Table for Testing Locations.................................................................................................................................................................11 Table for Supporting Units ..................................................................................................................................................................11 Table for Parameters of Test Software Setting.....................................................................................................................................11 Test Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................................13 4. TEST RESULT.................................................................................................................................................... 16 4.1. AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Measurement..........................................................................................................................16 4.2. Conducted Output Power Measurement ..........................................................................................................................................20 Power Spectral Density Measurement ...............................................................................................................................................57 4.3. 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth Measurement ...........................................................................................................................................74 4.4. Radiated Emissions Measurement.....................................................................................................................................................81 4.5. 4.6. Band Edge Emissions Measurement................................................................................................................................................107 Antenna Requirements....................................................................................................................................................................126 4.7. 5. LIST OF MEASURING EQUIPMENTS .................................................................................................................. 127 6. TEST LOCATION............................................................................................................................................ 129 7. TAF CERTIFICATE OF ACCREDITATION ............................................................................................................ 130 APPENDIX A. TEST PHOTOS ............................................................................................................................ A1 ~ A5 APPENDIX B. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE..............................................................................................B1 ~ B3 APPENDIX C. CO-LOCATION REPORT........................................................................................................... C1 ~ C3 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: i of ii

:Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB History of This Test Report REPORT NO. VERSION DESCRIPTION ISSUED DATE FR292829AB Rev. 01 Initial issue of report Oct. 31, 2012 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart C o 6 2437 MHz Further, this requirement does not apply to intentional radiators that must be professionally installed. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: ii of ii

:Oct. 31, 2012 2. SUMMARY OF THE TEST RESULT Report No.: FR292829AB Part Rule Section Description of Test Result Under Limit Applied Standard: 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart C 4.1 4.2 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 15.207 AC Power Line Conducted Emissions 15.247(b)(3) Conducted Output Power Measurement 15.247(e) Power Spectral Density 15.247(a)(2) 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth 15.247(d) 15.247(d) 15.203 Radiated Emissions Band Edge Emissions Antenna Requirements Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies 10.08 dB 1.60 dB 13.81 dB

-

0.52 dB 0.25 dB

-

Test Items Uncertainty Remark AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Maximum Conducted Output Power Power Spectral Density 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth Radiated Emissions (9kHz~30MHz) Radiated Emissions (30MHz~1000MHz) Radiated / Band Edge Emissions (1GHz~18GHz) Radiated Emissions (18GHz~40GHz) Temperature Humidity DC / AC Power Source 2.3dB 0.8dB 0.5dB 8.510-8 0.8dB 1.9dB 1.9dB 1.9dB 0.7 3.2%

1.4%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 2 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3. GENERAL INFORMATION 3.1. Product Details IEEE 802.11n Items Product Type Radio Type Power Type Modulation Data Modulation Data Rate (Mbps) Frequency Range Channel Number Channel Band Width (99%) Maximum Conducted Output Power Report No.: FR292829AB Description WLAN (3TX, 3RX) Intentional Transceiver From power Adapter see the below table for IEEE 802.11n OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM) see the below table for IEEE 802.11n 2400 ~ 2483.5MHz / 5725 ~ 5850MHz For 2.4GHz Band:

11 for 20MHz bandwidth ; 7 for 40MHz bandwidth For 5GHz Band:

5 for 20MHz bandwidth ; 2 for 40MHz bandwidth For 2.4GHz Band:

MCS0 (20MHz): 18.00 MHz ; MCS0 (40MHz): 35.52 MHz For 5GHz Band:

MCS0 (20MHz): 24.40 MHz ; MCS0 (40MHz): 47.52 MHz For 2.4GHz Band:

MCS0 (20MHz): 28.39 dBm ; MCS0 (40MHz): 21.85 dBm For 5GHz Band:

MCS0 (20MHz): 25.55 dBm ; MCS0 (40MHz): 25.85 dBm Carrier Frequencies Please refer to section 3.4 Antenna Please refer to section 3.3 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 3 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 802.11a/b/g Product Type Radio Type Power Type Modulation Data Modulation Data Rate (Mbps) Frequency Range Channel Number Report No.: FR292829AB Items Description WLAN (3TX, 3RX) Intentional Transceiver From power Adapter DSSS for IEEE 802.11b ; OFDM for IEEE 802.11a/g DSSS (BPSK / QPSK / CCK) ; OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM) DSSS (1/ 2/ 5.5/11) ; OFDM (6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54) 2400 ~ 2483.5MHz / 5725 ~ 5850MHz 11b/g: 11 ; 11a: 5 Channel Band Width (99%) 11b: 10.08 MHz ; 11g: 19.20 MHz ; 11a: 22.72 MHz Maximum Conducted Output Power 11b: 27.28 dBm ; 11g: 28.40 dBm ; 11a: 25.50 dBm Carrier Frequencies Antenna Please refer to section 3.4 Please refer to section 3.3 Note: The test configuration, test mode and test software used in this test report are designated by the applicant. Antenna & Band width Antenna Single (TX) Two (TX) Three (TX) Band width Mode 20 MHz 40 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X V V V V X X X V Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 4 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB IEEE 802.11n Modulation Scheme MCS Spatial Modulation Coding Data rate (Mbit/s) index streams type rate 20 MHz channel 40 MHz channel 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 BPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM BPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM BPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130 19.5 39 58.5 78 117 156 175.5 195 7.2 14.4 21.7 28.9 43.3 57.8 65 72.2 14.4 28.9 43.3 57.8 86.7 115.6 130 144.4 21.7 43.3 65 86.7 130 173.3 195 216.7 13.5 27 40.5 54 81 108 121.5 135 27 54 81 108 162 216 243 270 40.5 81 121.5 162 243 324 364.5 405 15 30 45 60 90 120 135 150 30 60 90 120 180 240 270 300 45 90 135 180 270 360 405 450 Symbol Explanation NSS R Number of spatial streams Code rate NBPSC Number of coded bits per single carrier NCBPS Number of coded bits per symbol NDBPS Number of data bits per symbol GI guard interval Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 5 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.2. Accessories Report No.: FR292829AB Power Brand Model P/N Rating Adapter 1 NETGEAR P030WF120B 332-10200-02 Adapter 2 NETGEAR MU30-5120250-A1 332-10234-01 Input:100V-240V~50/60Hz 1.0A Output:12V 2.5A Input:100V-240V~50/60Hz 0.8A Output:12V 2.5A Others RJ45 Cable, Shielded, 1.4m Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 6 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.3. Table for Filed Antenna Report No.: FR292829AB Ant. Brand Model Name Antenna Type Connector Gain (dBi) Remark 1 2 3 FOXCONN FOXCONN FOXCONN

-

-

-

PCB Antenna PCB Antenna PCB Antenna I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX Note: 1. The EUT has three antennas. (3TX/3RX) 2.4G 5G 3.52 3.85 3.25 3.47 2.4 4.18 TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX Ant. 1, Ant. 2, and Ant. 3 can be used as transmitting/receiving antennas. Ant. 1, Ant. 2, and Ant. 3 could transmit/receive simultaneously. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 7 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 3.4. Table for Carrier Frequencies For 2.4GHz Band For IEEE 802.11b/g, use Channel 1~Channel 11. There are two bandwidth systems for IEEE 802.11n. For both 20MHz bandwidth systems, use Channel 1~Channel 11. For both 40MHz bandwidth systems, use Channel 3~Channel 9. Frequency Band Channel No. Frequency Channel No. Frequency 2400~2483.5MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 2412 MHz 2417 MHz 2422 MHz 2427 MHz 2432 MHz 2437 MHz 7 8 9 10 11

-

2442 MHz 2447 MHz 2452 MHz 2457 MHz 2462 MHz

-

For 5GHz Band For IEEE 802.11a, use Channel 149, 153, 157, 161, 165. There are two bandwidth systems for IEEE 802.11n. For 20MHz bandwidth systems, use Channel 149, 153, 157, 161, 165. For 40MHz bandwidth systems, use Channel 151, 159. Frequency Band Channel No. Frequency Channel No. Frequency 5725~5850 MHz Band 4 149 151 153 157 5745 MHz 5755 MHz 5765 MHz 5785 MHz 159 161 165

-

5795 MHz 5805 MHz 5825 MHz

-

Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 8 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.5. Table for Test Modes Report No.: FR292829AB Preliminary tests were performed in different data rate to find the worst radiated emission. The data rate shown in the table below is the worst-case rate with respect to the specific test item. Investigation has been done on all the possible configurations for searching the worst cases. The following table is a list of the test modes shown in this test report. For 2.4GHz Band Test Items Mode Data Rate Channel Antenna AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Normal Link Auto

-

Maximum Conducted Output Power Average Output Power Power Spectral Density MCS0/20MHz 7.2 Mbps 1/6/11 MCS0/40MHz 14.4 Mbps 3/6/9 11b/CCK 11g/BPSK 1 Mbps 6 Mbps 1/6/11 1/6/11 1/6/11 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth MCS0/20MHz 7.2 Mbps MCS0/40MHz 14.4 Mbps 3/6/9 Radiated Emissions Below 1GHz Normal Link Auto 11b/CCK 11g/BPSK 1 Mbps 6 Mbps 1/6/11 1/6/11

-

Radiated Emissions Above 1GHz MCS0/20MHz 7.2 Mbps 1/6/11 MCS0/40MHz 14.4 Mbps 3/6/9 Band Edge Emissions 11b/CCK 11g/BPSK 1 Mbps 6 Mbps MCS0/20MHz 7.2 Mbps MCS0/40MHz 14.4 Mbps 11b/CCK 11g/BPSK 1 Mbps 6 Mbps 1/6/11 1/6/11 1/11 3/9 1/11 1/11

-

1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3

-

1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 9 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 For 5GHz Band Report No.: FR292829AB Test Items Mode Data Rate Channel Antenna AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Maximum Conducted Output Power Average Output Power Power Spectral Density 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth Normal Link Auto

-

-

MCS0/20MHz MCS0/40MHz 11a/BPSK MCS0/20MHz MCS0/40MHz 11a/BPSK 7.2 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 14.4 Mbps 151/159 1+2+3 6 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 7.2 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 14.4 Mbps 151/159 1+2+3 6 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 Radiated Emissions Below 1GHz Normal Link Auto

-

-

Radiated Emissions Above 1GHz Band Edge Emissions MCS0/20MHz MCS0/40MHz 11a/BPSK MCS0/20MHz MCS0/40MHz 11a/BPSK 7.2 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 14.4 Mbps 151/159 1+2+3 6 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 7.2 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 14.4 Mbps 151/159 1+2+3 6 Mbps 149/157/165 1+2+3 The following test modes were performed for all tests:

a. The following test modes were performed for Conducted Emission test:

Mode 1: EUT Upright+Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR P030WF120B) Mode 2: EUT Upright +Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR MU30-5120250-A1) Due to Mode 2 generated the worst test result, so it was recorded in this report. b. The following test modes were performed for Radiated Emission test:

Mode 1: EUT Upright+Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR P030WF120B) Mode 2: EUT Upright +Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR MU30-5120250-A1) Due to Mode 2 generated the worst test result, so it was recorded in this report. The EUT could be applied with WLAN 2.4G and WLAN 5 G function; therefore Maximum Permissible Exposure

(Please refer to Appendix B) and Co-location (please refer to Appendix C) tests are added for simultaneously transmit between wireless LAN function. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 10 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.6. Table for Testing Locations Report No.: FR292829AB Test Site No. Site Category 03CH01-CB SAC CO01-CB Conduction TH01-CB OVEN Room Location Hsin Chu Hsin Chu Hsin Chu FCC Reg. No. IC File No. VCCI Reg. No 187376 187376

-

IC 4086D IC 4086D

-

-

-

-

Open Area Test Site (OATS); Semi Anechoic Chamber (SAC) Please refer section 6 for Test Site Address. 3.7. Table for Supporting Units Support Unit Notebook Notebook Mouse Flash Disk Flash Disk Earphone Notebook Notebook Brand DELL DELL Logitech Silicon Silicon e-bppks DELL DELL Model E6220 E6220 M-U0026 D33B01 D33B02 N/A M1330 M1330 FCC ID N/A N/A DoC DoC DoC N/A E2K4965AGNM E2K4965AGNM 3.8. Table for Parameters of Test Software Setting During testing, Channel & Power Controlling Software provided by the customer was used to control the operating channel as well as the output power level. The RF output power selection is for the setting of RF output power expected by the customer and is going to be fixed on the firmware of the final end product. For 2.4GHz Band Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS0 20MHz Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS0 40MHz Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11b/g 2412 MHz 57 2422 MHz 50 Telnet 192.168.1.1 2437 MHz 91 Telnet 192.168.1.1 2437 MHz 63 2462 MHz 47 2452 MHz 44 Test Software Version Telnet 192.168.1.1 Frequency IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 74 64 83 92 78 56 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 11 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB For 5GHz Band Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS0 20MHz 5745 MHz 88 Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS0 40MHz Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11a Telnet 192.168.1.1 5785 MHz 88 Telnet 192.168.1.1 5825 MHz 88 5755 MHz 88 5795 MHz 88 Test Software Version Frequency IEEE 802.11a 5745 MHz 88 Telnet 192.168.1.1 5785 MHz 88 5825 MHz 88 During the test, Telnet 192.168.1.1 under WIN XP was executed the test program to control the EUT continuously transmit RF signal. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 12 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.9. Test Configurations 3.9.1. Radiation Emissions Test Configuration Test Configuration: 30MHz ~1GHz AC MAIN Load Report No.: FR292829AB l F a s h D s k i l F a s h D s k i 5 6 1 EUT 2 D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 WAN SOUND 4 3 Ear phone Mouse D C R J

-

4 5 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 LAN 2.4G NB 5G NB Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connection Power cable RJ-45 cable USB cable Earphone cable RJ-45 cable RJ-45 cable*3 Shield Length No Yes No No No No 1.8M 1.4M 1.8M 1.1M 10M 1.5M Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 13 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Test Configuration: above 1GHz Report No.: FR292829AB AC Main 1 EUT 2 D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 U S B U S B x 2 Notebook Item 1 2 Connection Power cable RJ-45 cable Shield Length No No 1.8M 10M Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 14 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.9.2. AC Power Line Conduction Emissions Test Configuration AC MAIN Load Report No.: FR292829AB l F a s h D s k i l F a s h D s k i 5 6 1 EUT 2 D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 WAN SOUND 4 3 Ear phone Mouse D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 LAN 2.4G NB 5G NB Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connection Power cable RJ-45 cable USB cable Earphone cable RJ-45 cable RJ-45 cable*3 Shield Length No Yes No No No No 1.8M 1.4M 1.8M 1.1M 10M 1.5M Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 15 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4. TEST RESULT Report No.: FR292829AB 4.1. AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Measurement 4.1.1. Limit For this product which is designed to be connected to the AC power line, the radio frequency voltage that is conducted back onto the AC power line on any frequency or frequencies within the band 150 kHz to 30 MHz shall not exceed below limits table. Frequency (MHz) QP Limit (dBuV) AV Limit (dBuV) 0.15~0.5 0.5~5 5~30 66~56 56 60 56~46 46 50 4.1.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the receiver. Receiver Parameters Attenuation Start Frequency Stop Frequency IF Bandwidth Setting 10 dB 0.15 MHz 30 MHz 9 KHz 4.1.3. Test Procedures 1. Configure the EUT according to ANSI C63.10. The EUT or host of EUT has to be placed 0.4 meter far from the conducting wall of the shielding room and at least 80 centimeters from any other grounded conducting surface. 2. Connect EUT or host of EUT to the power mains through a line impedance stabilization network (LISN). 3. All the support units are connected to the other LISNs. The LISN should provide 50uH/50ohms coupling impedance. The frequency range from 150 KHz to 30 MHz was searched. 4. 5. Set the test-receiver system to Peak Detect Function and Specified Bandwidth with Maximum Hold Mode. The measurement has to be done between each power line and ground at the power terminal. 6. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 16 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.1.4. Test Setup Layout Report No.: FR292829AB LEGEND:

(1) Interconnecting cables that hang closer than 40 cm to the ground plane shall be folded back and forth in the center forming a bundle 30 to 40 cm long.

(2) I/O cables that are not connected to a peripheral shall be bundled in the center. The end of the cable may be terminated, if required, using the correct terminating impedance. The overall length shall not exceed 1 m.

(3) EUT connected to one LISN. Unused LISN measuring port connectors shall be terminated in 50 . LISN can be placed on top of, or immediately beneath, reference ground plane.

(3.1) All other equipment powered from additional LISN(s).

(3.2) Multiple outlet strip can be used for multiple power cords of non-EUT equipment.

(3.3) LISN at least 80 cm from nearest part of EUT chassis.

(4) Cables of hand-operated devices, such as keyboards, mice, etc., shall be placed as for normal use.

(5) Non-EUT components of EUT system being tested.

(6) Rear of EUT, including peripherals, shall all be aligned and flush with rear of tabletop.

(7) Rear of tabletop shall be 40 cm removed from a vertical conducting plane that is bonded to the ground plane. 4.1.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.1.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was placed on the test table and programmed in normal function. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 17 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.1.7. Results of AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Measurement Temperature Test Engineer 25 Sin Chang Configuration Normal Link / Mode 2 Humidity Phase 61%

Line Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 18 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Temperature Test Engineer 21.2 Sin Chang Configuration Normal Link / Mode 2 Humidity Phase 49.2%

Neutral Report No.: FR292829AB Note:

Level = Read Level + LISN Factor + Cable Loss. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 19 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.2. Conducted Output Power Measurement 4.2.1. Limit For systems using digital modulation in the 2400-2483.5MHz, the limit for peak output power is 30dBm. The limited has to be reduced by the amount in dB that the gain of the antenna exceed 6dBi. In case of point-to-point operation, the limit has to be reduced by 1dB for every 3dB that the directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6dBi. 4.2.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Setting Auto Span Frequency Encompass the entire emissions bandwidth (EBW) of the signal RB VB Detector Trace Sweep Time 4.2.3. Test Procedures 1MHz 3MHz RMS Average 100 Auto 1. 2. The transmitter output (antenna port) was connected to the spectrum analyzer. Test was performed in accordance with KDB 558074 Guidance for Performing Compliance Measurements on Digital Transmission Systems (DTS)Operating Under 15.247 section 5.2.2.2. Multiple antenna systems was performed in accordance with KDB 662911 Emissions Testing of Transmitters with Multiple Outputs in the Same Band. 3. When measuring maximum conducted output power with multiple antenna systems, add every result of the values by mathematic formula. 4.2.4. Test Setup Layout Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 20 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.2.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.2.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report No.: FR292829AB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 21 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.2.7. Test Result of Maximum Conducted Output Power Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 01, 2012 For 2.4GHz Band Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 1 6 11 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 15.26 23.89 12.47 15.75 23.64 12.71 15.80 23.30 12.88 20.38 28.39 17.46 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 3 6 9 2422 MHz 2437 MHz 2452 MHz 14.30 17.36 11.88 14.13 16.97 12.24 13.74 16.88 12.85 18.83 21.85 17.11 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies For 5GHz Band Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 149 157 165 5745 MHz 5785 MHz 5825 MHz 20.63 20.85 20.56 20.92 20.91 20.69 20.31 20.58 20.67 25.40 25.55 25.41 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 151 159 5755 MHz 5795 MHz 20.79 20.91 21.06 21.07 20.99 21.25 25.72 25.85 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 22 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 01, 2012 Configuration IEEE 802.11b Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a/b/g Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 1 6 11 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 20.45 22.38 21.20 20.70 22.61 21.45 20.27 22.52 21.16 25.25 27.28 26.04 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11g Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 1 6 11 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 16.84 23.88 14.88 17.20 23.51 15.11 17.33 23.47 14.93 21.90 28.40 19.75 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11a Channel Frequency Conducted Channel power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Channel power (dBm) Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 149 157 165 5745 MHz 5785 MHz 5825 MHz 20.77 20.75 20.69 20.86 20.86 20.84 20.06 20.40 20.66 25.35 25.45 25.50 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies 30.00 Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 23 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 1 / 2412 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 24 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 1 / 2462 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 2 / 2412 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 25 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 2 / 2462 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 26 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 3 / 2412 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 27 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 3 / 2462 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 28 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 1 / 2422 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 29 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 1 / 2452 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 2 / 2422 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 30 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 2 / 2452 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 31 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 3 / 2422 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 32 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 3 / 2452 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 33 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 1 / 5745 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 1 / 5785 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 34 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 1 / 5825 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 2 / 5745 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 35 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 2 / 5785 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 2 / 5825 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 36 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 3 / 5745 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 3 / 5785 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 37 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ant. 3 / 5825 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 38 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 1 / 5755 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 1 / 5795 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 39 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 2 / 5755 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 2 / 5795 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 40 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 3 / 5755 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ant. 3 / 5795 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 41 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 1 / 2412 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 42 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 1 / 2462 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 2 / 2412 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 43 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 2 / 2462 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 44 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 3 / 2412 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 45 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b Ant. 3 / 2462 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 46 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 1 / 2412 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 47 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 1 / 2462 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 2 / 2412 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 48 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 2 / 2462 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 49 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 3 / 2412 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 50 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g Ant. 3 / 2462 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 51 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 1 / 5745 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 1 / 5785 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 52 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 1 / 5825 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 2 / 5745 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 53 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 2 / 5785 MHz Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 2 / 5825 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 54 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 3 / 5745 MHz Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 3 / 5785 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 55 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Conducted Output Power Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a Ant. 3 / 5825 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 56 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.3. Power Spectral Density Measurement 4.3.1. Limit For digitally modulated systems, the power spectral density conducted from the intentional radiator to the antenna shall not be greater than 8dBm in any 3 kHz band during any time interval of continuous transmission. 4.3.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Setting Attenuation Auto Span Frequency Set the analyzer span to 5-30% greater than the EBW. RB VB Detector Trace Sweep Time 4.3.3. Test Procedures 100 kHz 300 kHz RMS Single Sweep 10 x (number of measurement points in sweep) x (transmission symbol period). Test was performed in accordance with KDB 558074 Guidance for Performing Compliance Measurements on Digital Transmission Systems (DTS) Operating Under 15.247 section 5.3.2 Multiple antenna systems was performed in accordance with KDB 662911 in-Band Power Spectral Density (PSD) Measurements(2) Measure and add 10 log(N) dB (as described in the preceding section). Use this procedure when the maximum conducted output power in the fundamental emission is used to demonstrate compliance. The EUT must be configured to transmit continuously at full power over the measurement duration. Ensure that the number of measurement points in the sweep 2 x span/RBW (use of a greater number of measurement points than this minimum requirement is recommended). Use the peak marker function to determine the maximum level in any 100 kHz band segment within the fundamental EBW. Scale the observed power level to an equivalent level in 3 kHz by adjusting (reducing) the measured power by a bandwidth correction factor (BWCF) where: BWCF = 10log (3 kHz/100 kHz = -15.2 dB). The resulting PSD level must be 8 dBm. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 57 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.3.4. Test Setup Layout Report No.: FR292829AB 4.3.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.3.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 58 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.3.7. Test Result of Power Spectral Density Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su For 2.4GHz Band Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 1 6 2412 MHz

-4.21

-5.37

-4.73

-15.23

-19.44

-20.60

-19.96 3.23 Complies 2437 MHz 1.52 0.14 1.31

-15.23

-13.71

-15.09

-13.92 3.23 Complies 11 2462 MHz

-8.68

-10.63

-9.94

-15.23

-23.91

-25.86

-25.17 3.23 Complies Note: power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 3 6 9 2422 MHz

-8.59

-11.00

-10.16

-15.23

-23.82

-26.23

-25.39 3.23 Complies 2437 MHz

-5.35

-7.90

-6.97

-15.23

-20.58

-23.13

-22.20 3.23 Complies 2452 MHz

-10.61

-13.14

-12.45

-15.23

-25.84

-28.37

-27.68 3.23 Complies Note: power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 59 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su For 5GHz Band Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 149 157 165 5745 MHz

-0.88 5785 MHz

-0.83 5825 MHz

-0.36

-0.56

-0.61

-0.04

-0.03

-15.23

-16.11

-15.79

-15.26 3.23 Complies

-0.62

-15.23

-16.06

-15.84

-15.85 3.23 Complies 0.01

-15.23

-15.59

-15.27

-15.22 3.23 Complies Note: power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 151 159 5755 MHz

-2.88 5795 MHz

-2.84

-2.46

-2.20

-1.84

-15.23

-18.11

-17.69

-17.07 3.23 Complies

-2.18

-15.23

-18.07

-17.43

-17.41 3.23 Complies Note: power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 60 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Configuration IEEE 802.11b Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a/b/g Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 1 6 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 11 2462 MHz 3.80 4.65 3.43 1.67 2.51 1.31 2.93

-15.23

-11.43

-13.56

-12.30 3.23 Complies 4.20

-15.23

-10.58

-12.72

-11.03 3.23 Complies 3.00

-15.23

-11.80

-13.92

-12.23 3.23 Complies Note: Power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Configuration IEEE 802.11g Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 1 6 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 11 2462 MHz

-3.89 1.51

-7.57

-5.38

-0.06

-9.55

-4.45

-15.23

-19.12

-20.61

-19.68 3.23 Complies 1.16

-15.23

-13.72

-15.29

-14.07 3.23 Complies

-8.32

-15.23

-22.80

-24.78

-23.55 3.23 Complies Note: Power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Configuration IEEE 802.11a Power Density Power Density Power Density Channel Frequency

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz)

(dBm/100kHz) BWCF factor Power Power Power Density Density Density

(100KHz

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz)

(dBm/3kHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 to 3KHz) ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 Single Port Limit Result

(dBm/3kHz) 149 5745 MHz 0.19 157 5785 MHz 0.10 165 5825 MHz 0.53 0.29 0.38 0.58 1.10

-15.23

-15.04

-14.94

-14.13 3.23 Complies 0.95

-15.23

-15.13

-14.85

-14.28 3.23 Complies 0.74

-15.23

-14.70

-14.65

-14.49 3.23 Complies Note: power density limit =8-(10*LOG(3))=3.23dBm Note: All the test values were listed in the report. For plots, only the channel with maximum results was shown. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 61 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.52 dBm 2.432600000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 A SGL LVL 6DB

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:51:41 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz A SGL LVL 6DB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

0.14 dBm 2.433240000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:53:07 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 62 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.31 dBm 2.432600000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 A SGL LVL 6DB

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:52:22 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 63 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-5.35 dBm 2.437600000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:00:27 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-7.90 dBm 2.438200000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:59:08 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 64 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-6.97 dBm 2.437900000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:59:53 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 65 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 / 5745 MHz Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 2 / 5825 MHz A SGL LVL 6DB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-0.04 dBm 5.821480000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.825 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:26:11 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 66 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 3 / 5825 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

0.01 dBm 5.827440000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.825 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:25:17 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 / 5795 MHz A SGL LVL 6DB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-2.84 dBm 5.792400000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.795 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:39:15 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 67 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 2 / 5795 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-2.20 dBm 5.794000000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.795 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:39:51 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 3 / 5795 MHz A SGL LVL 6DB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-2.18 dBm 5.792400000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.795 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:40:29 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 68 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

4.65 dBm 2.437640000 GHz 1 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:37:27 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

2.51 dBm 2.437720000 GHz 1 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:38:14 A SGL LVL 6DB A SGL LVL 6DB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 69 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

4.20 dBm 2.437600000 GHz 1 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:36:43 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.51 dBm 2.434160000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:44:48 A SGL LVL 6DB A SGL LVL 6DB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 70 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 2 / 2437 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-0.06 dBm 2.433200000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:44:03 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.16 dBm 2.432600000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:45:26 Report No.: FR292829AB A SGL LVL 6DB A SGL LVL 6DB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 71 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 / 5825 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

0.53 dBm 5.827440000 GHz 1 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.825 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:22:48 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 2 / 5825 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

0.58 dBm 5.821200000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.825 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:23:45 A SGL LVL 6DB A SGL LVL 6DB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 72 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 3 / 5745 MHz

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.10 dBm 5.741200000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 Report No.: FR292829AB A SGL LVL 6DB

-80 Center 5.745 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:20:15 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 73 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.4. 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth Measurement 4.4.1. Limit For digital modulation systems, the minimum 6dB bandwidth shall be at least 500 kHz. 4.4.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameters Setting Attenuation Auto Span Frequency

> 6dB Bandwidth RB VB Detector Trace Sweep Time 4.4.3. Test Procedures Set resolution bandwidth (RBW) = 1-5% or DTS BW, not to exceed 100 kHz. 3 x RBW Peak Max Hold Auto 1. 2. The transmitter output (antenna port) was connected to the spectrum analyzer in peak hold mode. Test was performed in accordance with KDB 558074 Guidance for Performing Compliance Measurements on Digital Transmission Systems (DTS) Operating Under 15.247 section 5.1.1 EBW Measurement Procedure 3. Multiple antenna system was performed in accordance with KDB 662911 Emissions Testing of Transmitters with Multiple Outputs in the Same Band. 4. Measured the spectrum width with power higher than 6dB below carrier. 4.4.4. Test Setup Layout 4.4.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.4.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 74 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.4.7. Test Result of 6dB Spectrum Bandwidth Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n For 2.4GHz Band Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 1 6 11 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 15.12 12.00 15.44 17.20 18.00 17.28 500.00 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 3 6 9 2422 MHz 2437 MHz 2452 MHz 31.20 31.68 31.20 35.40 35.52 35.40 500.00 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Complies For 5GHz Band Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 149 157 165 5745 MHz 5785 MHz 5825 MHz 16.32 16.32 16.32 23.84 23.76 24.40 500.00 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 151 159 5755 MHz 5795 MHz 35.36 36.32 44.32 47.52 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 75 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a/b/g Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 1 6 11 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 8.08 8.16 8.08 10.08 10.08 10.08 500.00 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 1 6 11 2412 MHz 2437 MHz 2462 MHz 16.32 11.28 16.32 16.64 19.20 16.48 500.00 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Complies Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 6dB Bandwidth 99% Occupied

(MHz) BW (MHz) Min. Limit (kHz) Result 149 157 165 5745 MHz 5785 MHz 5825 MHz 14.48 14.56 14.48 22.00 22.40 22.72 500.00 500.00 500.00 Complies Complies Complies Note: All the test values were listed in the report. For plots, only the channel with maximum results was shown. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 76 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3 / 2437MHz 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3/ 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 77 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3 / 5785 MHz 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3 / 5795 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 78 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3 / 2437 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 79 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 6 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant. 3 / 5785 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 80 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.5. Radiated Emissions Measurement 4.5.1. Limit Report No.: FR292829AB 30dBc in any 100 kHz bandwidth outside the operating frequency band. In case the emission fall within the restricted band specified on 15.205(a), then the 15.209(a) limit in the table below has to be followed. Frequencies

(MHz) 0.009~0.490 0.490~1.705 1.705~30.0 30~88 88~216 216~960 Above 960 Field Strength

(micorvolts/meter) 2400/F(KHz) 24000/F(KHz) 30 100 150 200 500 Measurement Distance

(meters) 300 30 30 3 3 3 3 4.5.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of spectrum analyzer and receiver. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Start Frequency Stop Frequency Setting Auto 1GHz 10th carrier harmonic RB / VB (Emission in restricted band) 1MHz / 3MHz for Peak, 1MHz / 10Hz for Average RB / VB (Emission in non-restricted band) 1MHz / 3MHz for peak Receiver Parameter Attenuation Start ~ Stop Frequency Start ~ Stop Frequency Start ~ Stop Frequency Setting Auto 9kHz~150kHz / RB 200Hz for QP 150kHz~30MHz / RB 9kHz for QP 30MHz~1GHz / RB 120kHz for QP Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 81 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.5.3. Test Procedures Report No.: FR292829AB 1. Configure the EUT according to ANSI C63.10. The EUT was placed on the top of the turntable 0.8 meter above ground. The phase center of the receiving antenna mounted on the top of a height-variable antenna tower was placed 3 meters far away from the turntable. 2. Power on the EUT and all the supporting units. The turntable was rotated by 360 degrees to determine 3. the position of the highest radiation. The height of the broadband receiving antenna was varied between one meter and four meters above ground to find the maximum emissions field strength of both horizontal and vertical polarization. 4. For each suspected emissions, the antenna tower was scan (from 1 M to 4 M) and then the turntable was rotated (from 0 degree to 360 degrees) to find the maximum reading. 5. Set the test-receiver system to Peak or CISPR quasi-peak Detect Function with specified bandwidth under Maximum Hold Mode. 6. For emissions above 1GHz, use 1MHz VBW and 3MHz RBW for peak reading. Then 1MHz RBW and 10Hz VBW for average reading in spectrum analyzer. 7. When the radiated emissions limits are expressed in terms of the average value of the emissions, and pulsed operation is employed, the measurement field strength shall be determined by averaging over one complete pulse train, including blanking intervals, as long as the pulse train does not exceed 0.1 seconds. As an alternative (provided the transmitter operates for longer than 0.1 seconds) or in cases where the pulse train exceeds 0.1 seconds, the measured field strength shall be determined from the average absolute voltage during a 0.1 second interval during which the field strength is at its maximum value. If the emissions level of the EUT in peak mode was 3 dB lower than the average limit specified, then testing will be stopped and peak values of EUT will be reported, otherwise, the emissions which do not have 3 dB margin will be repeated one by one using the quasi-peak method for below 1GHz. 8. 9. For testing above 1GHz, the emissions level of the EUT in peak mode was lower than average limit (that means the emissions level in peak mode also complies with the limit in average mode), then testing will be stopped and peak values of EUT will be reported, otherwise, the emissions will be measured in average mode again and reported. 10. In case the emission is lower than 30MHz, loop antenna has to be used for measurement and the recorded data should be QP measured by receiver. High Low scan is not required in this case. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 82 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.5.4. Test Setup Layout For radiated emissions below 1GHz Report No.: FR292829AB For radiated emissions above 1GHz 4.5.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.5.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 83 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.5.7. Results of Radiated Emissions (9kHz~30MHz) Temperature Test Engineer 26 Magic Lai Test Date Oct. 08, 2012 Humidity 60%

Configurations Normal Link Freq.

(MHz)

-

Level

(dBuV)

-

Over Limit

(dB)

-

Limit Line

(dBuV)

-

Remark See Note Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20 dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Distance extrapolation factor = 40 log (specific distance / test distance) (dB);

Limit line = specific limits (dBuV) + distance extrapolation factor. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 84 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.5.8. Results of Radiated Emissions (30MHz~1GHz) Temperature Test Engineer Horizontal 26 Magic Lai Humidity 60%

Configurations Normal Link / Mode 2 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 85 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Vertical Report No.: FR292829AB Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 86 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.5.9. Results for Radiated Emissions (1GHz~10th Harmonic) Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 1 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Sep. 04, 2012 Horizontal Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 87 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 6 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 88 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch11 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 89 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 3 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 90 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 6 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 91 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 9 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 92 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations 11a IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz CH 149 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 93 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations 11a IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz CH 157 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 94 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations 11a IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz CH 165 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 95 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations 11a IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz CH 151 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 96 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations 11a IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz CH 159 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 97 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11b CH 1 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 98 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11b CH 6 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 99 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11b CH 11 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 100 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11g CH 1 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 101 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11g CH 6 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 102 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11g CH 11 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 103 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a CH 149 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 104 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a CH 157 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 105 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a CH 165 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Sep. 04, 2012 Vertical Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 106 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.6. Band Edge Emissions Measurement 4.6.1. Limit 30dBc in any 100 kHz bandwidth outside the operating frequency band. In case the emission fall within the restricted band specified on 15.205(a), then the 15.209(a) limit in the table below has to be followed. Frequencies

(MHz) 0.009~0.490 0.490~1.705 1.705~30.0 30~88 88~216 216~960 Above 960 Field Strength

(micorvolts/meter) 2400/F(KHz) 24000/F(KHz) 30 100 150 200 500 Measurement Distance

(meters) 300 30 30 3 3 3 3 4.6.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Span Frequency Setting Auto 100 MHz RB / VB (Emission in restricted band) 1MHz / 3MHz for Peak, 1 MHz / 10Hz for Average RB / VB (Emission in non-restricted band) 100 KHz / 300 KHz for Peak 4.6.3. Test Procedures 11. The test procedure is the same as section 4.5.3, only the frequency range investigated is limited to 100MHz around bandedges. 4.6.4. Test Setup Layout This test setup layout is the same as that shown in section 4.5.4. 4.6.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.6.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 107 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB 4.6.7. Test Result of Band Edge and Fundamental Emissions Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 1, 6, 11 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test date Channel 1 Jul. 05, 2011 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2412 MHz. Channel 6 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2437MHz. Channel 11 Item 1, 2 are the fundamental frequency at 2462 MHz. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 108 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 3, 6, 9 /

Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test date Channel 3 Jul. 05, 2011 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2422 MHz. Channel 6 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2437MHz. Channel 9 Item 1, 2 are the fundamental frequency at 2452 MHz. Note:

Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 109 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11b CH 1, 6, 11/ Ant. 1

+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Channel 1 Sep. 04, 2012 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2412 MHz. Channel 6 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2437 MHz. Channel 11 Item 1, 2 are the fundamental frequency at 2462 MHz. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 110 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11g CH 1, 6, 11/ Ant. 1 +

Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Channel 1 Sep. 04, 2012 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2412 MHz. Channel 6 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 2437 MHz. Channel 11 Item 1, 2 are the fundamental frequency at 2462 MHz. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 111 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB For Emission not in Restricted Band Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz (Reference Level)

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.52 dBm 2.432600000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 A SGL LVL 6DB

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:51:41 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2412 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 112 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2437MHz (down 30 dBc) Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2462 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 113 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz (Reference Level) Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-5.35 dBm 2.437600000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:00:27 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2422 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 114 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2437 MHz (down 30 dBc) Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2452 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 115 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 3 / 5825 MHz (Reference Level) Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

0.01 dBm 5.827440000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.825 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:25:17 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5745 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 116 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5785 MHz (down 30 dBc) Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5825 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 117 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 3 / 5755 MHz (Reference Level) Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

-1.84 dBm 5.756500000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.755 GHz 5 MHz/

Span 50 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:37:58 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5755 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 118 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5795 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 119 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz (Reference Level) Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

4.65 dBm 2.437640000 GHz 1 A SGL LVL 6DB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:37:27 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2412 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report No.: FR292829AB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 120 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2437 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2462 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 121 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 1 / 2437 MHz (Reference Level)

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.51 dBm 2.434160000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 1.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 Report No.: FR292829AB A SGL LVL 6DB

-80 Center 2.437 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 19:44:48 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2412 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 122 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11b / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2437 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11g / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 2462 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 123 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 3 / 5745 MHz (Reference Level)

*

*

*

*

RBW 120 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWT 10 s Marker 1 [T1 ]

1.10 dBm 5.741200000 GHz Ref 20 dBm 20 Offset 2.5 dB

*

Att 30 dB 1 RM MAXH

*

10 0 1

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 Report No.: FR292829AB A SGL LVL 6DB

-80 Center 5.745 GHz 2 MHz/

Span 20 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 20:20:15 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5745 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 124 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5785 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report No.: FR292829AB Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1+ Ant. 2+ Ant.3 / 5825 MHz (down 30 dBc) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 125 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.7. Antenna Requirements 4.7.1. Limit Report No.: FR292829AB Except for special regulations, the Low-power Radio-frequency Devices must not be equipped with any jacket for installing an antenna with extension cable. An intentional radiator shall be designed to ensure that no antenna other than that furnished by the responsible party shall be used with the device. The use of a permanently attached antenna or of an antenna that uses a unique coupling to the intentional radiator shall be considered sufficient to comply with the provisions of this Section. The manufacturer may design the unit so that the user can replace a broken antenna, but the use of a standard antenna jack or electrical connector is prohibited. Further, this requirement does not apply to intentional radiators that must be professionally installed. 4.7.2. Antenna Connector Construction Please refer to section 3.3 in this test report; antenna connector complied with the requirements. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 126 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 5. LIST OF MEASURING EQUIPMENTS Report No.: FR292829AB Instrument Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Characteristics Calibration Date EMI Test Receiver R&S ESCS 30 100377 9kHz ~ 2.75GHz Sep. 14, 2012 LISN V- LISN F.C.C. FCC-LISN-50-16-2 04083 150kHz ~ 100MHz Nov. 14, 2011 Schwarzbeck NSLK 8127 8127-478 9K ~ 30MHz Jun. 22, 2012 PULSE LIMITER R&S COND Cable Woken ESH3-Z2 Cable 100430 9K~30MHz Feb. 03, 2012 01 0.15MHz~30MHz Dec. 04, 2011 BILOG ANTENNA Schaffner CBL6112D 22021 20MHz ~ 2GHz Jan. 11, 2012 Horn Antenna EMCO 3115 00075790 750MHz~18GHz Nov. 25, 2011 Horn Antenna SCHWARZBEAK BBHA 9170 BBHA9170252 15GHz ~ 40GHz Nov. 22, 2011 Pre-Amplifier Pre-Amplifier Pre-Amplifier Spectrum analyzer EMI Test Receiver Loop Antenna Turn Table Antenna Mast RF Cable-low RF Cable-high RF Cable-high RF Cable-high RF Cable-high Temp. and Humidity Chamber Thermo-Hygro Meter Signal Generator RF Power Divider RF Power Splitter RF Power Splitter RF Cable-high RF Cable-high RF Cable-high RF Cable-high RF Cable-high Agilent Agilent WM R&S R&S Teseq INN CO INN CO Woken Woken Woken Woken Woken 8447D 8449B 2944A10991 0.1MHz ~ 1.3GHz Nov. 17, 2011 3008A02310 1GHz ~ 26.5GHz Nov. 29, 2011 TF-130N-R1 923365 26.5GHz ~ 40GHz Jul. 31, 2012 FSP40 100056 9KHz~40GHz Nov. 03, 2011 ESCS 30 100355 9KHz ~ 2.75GHz Mar. 20, 2012 HLA 6120 CO 2000 CO2000 Low Cable-1 High Cable-1 High Cable-2 High Cable-3 High Cable-4 24155 9 kHz - 30 MHz Sep. 09, 2012 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 360 degree 1 m - 4 m N/A N/A 30 MHz - 1 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz - 40 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz - 40 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 Ten Billion TTH-D3SP TBN-931011

-30~100 degree Jun. 05, 2012 N/A R&S HP Anaren Anaren Woken Woken Woken Woken Woken HC 520 SMR40 11636A 44100 42100 High Cable-7 High Cable-8 High Cable-9 High Cable-10 High Cable-11

#1 15~70 degree Nov. 02, 2011 100302 10MHz-40GHz Nov. 22, 2011 00306 1839 17930 2GHz ~ 18GHz 2GHz ~ 18GHz 2GHz ~ 18GHz N/A N/A N/A

-

-

-

-

-

1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 Remark Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 127 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AB Instrument Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Characteristics Calibration Date RF Cable-high RF Cable-high Power Sensor Power Meter Woken Woken Anritsu Anritsu High Cable-12 High Cable-13

-

-

1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 MA2411B 0917223 300MHz~40GHz Nov. 01, 2011 ML2495A 1035008 300MHz~40GHz Nov. 01, 2011 Remark Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Note: Calibration Interval of instruments listed above is one year. Note: * Calibration Interval of instruments listed above is two years. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 128 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 6. TEST LOCATION Report No.: FR292829AB SHIJR ADD

: 6Fl., No. 106, Sec. 1, Shintai 5th Rd., Shijr City, Taipei, Taiwan 221, R.O.C. TEL

: 886-2-2696-2468 FAX

: 886-2-2696-2255 HWA YA ADD

: No. 52, Hwa Ya 1st Rd., Kwei-Shan Hsiang, Tao Yuan Hsien, Taiwan, R.O.C. TEL

: 886-3-327-3456 FAX

: 886-3-318-0055 LINKOU ADD

: No. 30-2, Dingfu Tsuen, Linkou Shiang, Taipei, Taiwan 244, R.O.C TEL

: 886-2-2601-1640 FAX

: 886-2-2601-1695 DUNGHU ADD

: No. 3, Lane 238, Kangle St., Neihu Chiu, Taipei, Taiwan 114, R.O.C. TEL

: 886-2-2631-4739 FAX

: 886-2-2631-9740 JUNGHE ADD

: 7Fl., No. 758, Jungjeng Rd., Junghe City, Taipei, Taiwan 235, R.O.C. TEL

: 886-2-8227-2020 FAX

: 886-2-8227-2626 NEIHU ADD

: 4Fl., No. 339, Hsin Hu 2nd Rd., Taipei 114, Taiwan, R.O.C. TEL

: 886-2-2794-8886 FAX

: 886-2-2794-9777 JHUBEI ADD

: No.8, Lane 724, Bo-ai St., Jhubei City, HsinChu County 302, Taiwan, R.O.C. TEL

: 886-3-656-9065 FAX

: 886-3-656-9085 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 129 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012 7. TAF CERTIFICATE OF ACCREDITATION Report No.: FR292829AB Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 130 of 130

: Oct. 31, 2012

 

 

SPORTON International Inc. No. 52, Hwa Ya 1st Rd., Kwei-Shan Hsiang, TaoYuan Hsien, Taiwan, R.O.C. Ph: 886-3-327-3456 / FAX: 886-3-327-0973 / www.sporton.com.tw FCC RADIO TEST REPORT Applicants company NETGEAR, Inc. Applicant Address 350 East Plumeria Drive, San Jose, California 95134-1911 FCC ID PY312300207 Manufacturers company Manufacturer Address Ambit Microsystems (Shanghai) Ltd. No. 1925, Nanle Road, Songjiang Export Processing Zone, Shanghai, China Product Name N900 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Brand Name Model Name Test Rule Part(s) Test Freq. Range Received Date Final Test Date NETGEAR WNDR4500v2 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart E 15.407 5150 ~ 5250MHz Sep. 04, 2012 Oct. 29, 2012 Submission Type Original Equipment Operating Mode Master Statement Test result included is for the IEEE 802.11n and IEEE 802.11a (5150 ~ 5250MHz) of the product. The test result in this report refers exclusively to the presented test model / sample. Without written approval of SPORTON International Inc., the test report shall not be reproduced except in full. The measurements and test results shown in this test report were made in accordance with the procedures and found in compliance with the limit given in ANSI C63.10-2009 and 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart E and KDB 789033 20120926. The test equipment used to perform the test is calibrated and traceable to NML/ROC. Report Format Version: 01 Report No.: FR292829AA Table of Contents 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. 1. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE.......................................................................................................................... 1 2. SUMMARY OF THE TEST RESULT........................................................................................................................... 2 3. GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................................... 3 Product Details ....................................................................................................................................................................................3 Accessories .........................................................................................................................................................................................5 Table for Filed Antenna .......................................................................................................................................................................6 Table for Carrier Frequencies...............................................................................................................................................................7 Table for Test Modes............................................................................................................................................................................7 Table for Testing Locations...................................................................................................................................................................8 Table for Supporting Units ....................................................................................................................................................................9 Table for Parameters of Test Software Setting.......................................................................................................................................9 Test Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................................10 4. TEST RESULT.................................................................................................................................................... 13 4.1. AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Measurement..........................................................................................................................13 4.2. 99% Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .........................................................................................................................................17 4.3. Maximum Conducted Output Power Measurement .........................................................................................................................28 Power Spectral Density Measurement ...............................................................................................................................................32 4.4. Peak Excursion Measurement............................................................................................................................................................39 4.5. 4.6. Radiated Emissions Measurement.....................................................................................................................................................46 Band Edge Emissions Measurement..................................................................................................................................................65 4.7. Frequency Stability Measurement .....................................................................................................................................................72 4.8. 4.9. Antenna Requirements......................................................................................................................................................................74 5. LIST OF MEASURING EQUIPMENTS .................................................................................................................... 75 6. TEST LOCATION.............................................................................................................................................. 77 7. TAF CERTIFICATE OF ACCREDITATION .............................................................................................................. 78 APPENDIX A. TEST PHOTOS ............................................................................................................................ A1 ~ A5 APPENDIX B. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE..............................................................................................B1 ~ B3 APPENDIX C. CO-LOCATION REPORT........................................................................................................... C1 ~ C3 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: i of ii

:Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA History of This Test Report REPORT NO. VERSION DESCRIPTION ISSUED DATE FR292829AA Rev. 01 Initial issue of report Oct. 31, 2012 36/52 1 5180 MHz 5260 MHz 42 50 42/50/58 5210 MHz 5250 MHz 42 5210 MHz 5.15~5.25 GHz 5.15-5.35 GHz 5.25-5.35 GHz 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart E Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Further, this requirement does not apply to intentional radiators that must be professionally installed. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: ii of ii

:Oct. 31, 2012 2. SUMMARY OF THE TEST RESULT Report No.: FR292829AA Part Rule Section Description of Test Result Under Limit Applied Standard: 47 CFR FCC Part 15 Subpart E 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 15.207 15.407(a) 15.407(a) 15.407(a) 15.407(a) 15.407(b) 15.407(b) 15.407(g) 15.203 AC Power Line Conducted Emissions 26dB Spectrum Bandwidth Maximum Conducted Output Power Power Spectral Density Peak Excursion Radiated Emissions Band Edge Emissions Frequency Stability Antenna Requirements Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies Complies 10.08 dB

-

0.03 dB 0.09 dB 2.35 dB 0.69 dB 0.11 dB

-

-

Test Items AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Maximum Conducted Output Power Power Spectral Density Peak Excursion 26dB Spectrum Bandwidth / Frequency Stability Radiated Emissions (9kHz~30MHz) Radiated Emissions (30MHz~1000MHz) Radiated / Band Edge Emissions (1GHz~18GHz) Radiated Emissions (18GHz~40GHz) Temperature Humidity DC / AC Power Source Uncertainty 2.3dB 0.5dB 0.5dB 0.5dB 8.510-8 0.8dB 1.9dB 1.9dB 1.9dB 0.7 3.2%

1.4%

Remark Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Confidence levels of 95%

Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 2 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 3. GENERAL INFORMATION 3.1. Product Details IEEE 802.11n Items Product Type Radio Type Power Type Modulation Data Modulation Data Rate (Mbps) Frequency Range Channel Number Channel Band Width (99%) Report No.: FR292829AA Description WLAN (3TX, 3RX) Intentional Transceiver From power Adapter see the below table for IEEE 802.11n OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM) see the below table for IEEE 802.11n 5150 ~ 5250MHz 4 for 20MHz bandwidth ; 2 for 40MHz bandwidth MCS0 (20MHz): 17.76 MHz ; MCS0 (40MHz): 37.12 MHz MCS8 (20MHz): 18.08 MHz ; MCS8 (40MHz): 36.48 MHz Conducted Output Power Band 1: MCS0 (20MHz): 16.35 dBm ; MCS0 (40MHz): 16.96 dBm Band 1: MCS8 (20MHz): 16.97 dBm ; MCS8 (40MHz): 16.85 dBm Carrier Frequencies Please refer to section 3.4 Antenna IEEE 802.11a Items Product Type Radio Type Power Type Modulation Data Modulation Data Rate (Mbps) Frequency Range Channel Number Please refer to section 3.3 Description WLAN (3TX, 3RX) Intentional Transceiver From power Adapter OFDM for IEEE 802.11a OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM) OFDM (6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54) 5150 ~ 5250MHz 4 Channel Band Width (99%) 11a: 16.96 MHz Conducted Output Power Band 1: 16.39 dBm Carrier Frequencies Please refer to section 3.4 Antenna Please refer to section 3.3 Note: The test configuration, test mode and test software used in this test report are designated by the applicant. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 3 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Antenna & Band width Report No.: FR292829AA Antenna Single (TX) Two (TX) Three (TX) Band width Mode 20 MHz 40 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11n V X X X X X X X V V X V IEEE 802.11n Modulation Scheme MCS Spatial Modulation Coding Data rate (Mbit/s) index streams type rate 20 MHz channel 40 MHz channel 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 BPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM BPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM BPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 64-QAM 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130 19.5 39 58.5 78 117 156 175.5 195 7.2 14.4 21.7 28.9 43.3 57.8 65 72.2 14.4 28.9 43.3 57.8 86.7 115.6 130 144.4 21.7 43.3 65 86.7 130 173.3 195 216.7 13.5 27 40.5 54 81 108 121.5 135 27 54 81 108 162 216 243 270 40.5 81 121.5 162 243 324 364.5 405 15 30 45 60 90 120 135 150 30 60 90 120 180 240 270 300 45 90 135 180 270 360 405 450 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 4 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Symbol Explanation NSS R NBPSC NCBPS NDBPS GI Number of spatial streams Code rate Number of coded bits per single carrier Number of coded bits per symbol Number of data bits per symbol guard interval 3.2. Accessories Power Brand Model P/N Rating Adapter 1 NETGEAR P030WF120B 332-10200-02 Adapter 2 NETGEAR MU30-5120250-A1 332-10234-01 Input:100V-240V~50/60Hz 1.0A Output:12V 2.5A Input:100V-240V~50/60Hz 0.8A Output:12V 2.5A Others RJ45 Cable, Shielded, 1.4m Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 5 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.3. Table for Filed Antenna Report No.: FR292829AA Ant. Brand Model Name Antenna Type Connector Gain (dBi) Remark 1 2 3 FOXCONN FOXCONN FOXCONN

-

-

-

PCB Antenna PCB Antenna PCB Antenna I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX 3.85 3.47 4.18 TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX Note: 1. The EUT has three antennas. (3TX/3RX) Ant. 1, Ant. 2, and Ant. 3 can be used as transmitting/receiving antennas. Ant. 1, Ant. 2, and Ant. 3 could transmit/receive simultaneously. 2. According to the above antennas, there are three antennas will transit simultaneously (one is Horizontal and the others are Vertical) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 6 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 3.4. Table for Carrier Frequencies For IEEE 802.11a, use Channel 36, 40, 44, 48. There are two bandwidth systems for IEEE 802.11n. For both 20MHz bandwidth systems, use Channel 36, 40, 44, 48. For both 40MHz bandwidth systems, use Channel 38, 46. Frequency Band Channel No. Frequency Channel No. Frequency 5150~5250 MHz Band 1 36 38 40 5180 MHz 5190 MHz 5200 MHz 44 46 48 5220 MHz 5230 MHz 5240 MHz 3.5. Table for Test Modes Preliminary tests were performed in different data rate to find the worst radiated emission. The data rate shown in the table below is the worst-case rate with respect to the specific test item. Investigation has been done on all the possible configurations for searching the worst cases. The following table is a list of the test modes shown in this test report. Test Items Mode Data Rate Channel Antenna AC Power Conducted Emission Max. Conducted Output Power Power Spectral Density 26dB Spectrum Bandwidth 99% Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Peak Excursion Radiated Emission Below 1GHz Radiated Emission Above 1GHz Band Edge Emission Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Normal Link Auto

-

-

MCS0/20MHz Band 1 7.2Mbps 36/40/48 MCS0/40MHz Band 1 14.4 Mbps 38/46 MCS8/20MHz Band 1 15 Mbps 36/40/48 MCS8/40MHz Band 1 30 Mbps 38/46 11a/BPSK Band 1 6Mbps 36/40/48 MCS0/20MHz Band 1 7.2Mbps 36/40/48 MCS0/40MHz Band 1 14.4 Mbps 38/46 MCS8/20MHz Band 1 15 Mbps 36/40/48 MCS8/40MHz Band 1 30 Mbps 38/46 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 11a/BPSK Band 1 6Mbps 36/40/48 1+2+3 Normal Link Auto

-

-

MCS0/20MHz MCS0/40MHz MCS8/20MHz MCS8/40MHz 11a/BPSK MCS0/20MHz MCS0/40MHz Band 1 Band 1 Band 1 Band 1 Band 1 Band 1 Band 1 7.2Mbps 36/40/48 14.4 Mbps 38/46 15 Mbps 36/40/48 30 Mbps 38/46 6Mbps 36/40/48 7.2Mbps 36/40/48 14.4 Mbps 38/46 1+2+3 1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 1+2+3 Page No. Issued Date

: 7 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA MCS8/20MHz MCS8/40MHz 11a/BPSK Band 1 Band 1 Band 1 15 Mbps 36/40/48 30 Mbps 38/46 1/2/3/1+2+3 1/2/3/1+2+3 6Mbps 36/40/48 1+2+3 Frequency Stability Un-modulation

-

40 N/A The following test modes were performed for all tests:

a. The following test modes were performed for Conducted Emission test:

Mode 1: EUT Upright+Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR P030WF120B) Mode 2: EUT Upright +Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR MU30-5120250-A1) Due to Mode 2 generated the worst test result, so it was recorded in this report. b. The following test modes were performed for Radiated Emission test:

Mode 1: EUT Upright+Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR P030WF120B) Mode 2: EUT Upright +Wireless Link+LAN Link+WAN link+USB Read/Write+Adapter(NETGEAR MU30-5120250-A1) Due to Mode 2 generated the worst test result, so it was recorded in this report. The EUT could be applied with WLAN 2.4G and WLAN 5 G function; therefore Maximum Permissible Exposure

(Please refer to Appendix B) and Co-location (please refer to Appendix C) tests are added for simultaneously transmit between wireless LAN function. 3.6. Table for Testing Locations Test Site No. Site Category 03CH01-CB SAC CO01-CB Conduction TH01-CB OVEN Room Location Hsin Chu Hsin Chu Hsin Chu FCC Reg. No. IC File No. VCCI Reg. No 187376 187376

-

IC 4086D IC 4086D

-

-

-

-

Open Area Test Site (OATS); Semi Anechoic Chamber (SAC) Please refer section 6 for Test Site Address. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 8 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.7. Table for Supporting Units Report No.: FR292829AA Support Unit Notebook Notebook Mouse Flash Disk Flash Disk Earphone Notebook Notebook Brand DELL DELL Logitech Silicon Silicon e-bppks DELL DELL Model E6220 E6220 M-U0026 D33B01 D33B02 N/A M1330 M1330 FCC ID N/A N/A DoC DoC DoC N/A E2K4965AGNM E2K4965AGNM 3.8. Table for Parameters of Test Software Setting During testing, Channel & Power Controlling Software provided by the customer was used to control the operating channel as well as the output power level. The RF output power selection is for the setting of RF output power expected by the customer and is going to be fixed on the firmware of the final end product. Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS0 20MHz 5180 MHz 52.00 Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS0 40MHz 5190 MHz 46.00 Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS8 20MHz 5180 MHz 51.00 Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11n Test Software Version Frequency MCS8 40MHz 5190 MHz 50.00 Power Parameters of IEEE 802.11a Test Software Version Frequency IEEE 802.11a 5180 MHz 50.00 DOS 5200 MHz 52.00 DOS DOS 5200 MHz 51.00 DOS DOS 5200 MHz 50.00 5240 MHz 52.00 5230 MHz 52.00 5240 MHz 51.00 5230 MHz 50.00 5240 MHz 52.00 During the test, DOS under WIN XP was executed the test program to control the EUT continuously transmit RF signal. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 9 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.9. Test Configurations 3.9.1. Radiation Emissions Test Configuration Test Configuration: 30MHz ~1GHz AC MAIN Load Report No.: FR292829AA l F a s h D s k i l F a s h D s k i 5 6 1 EUT 2 D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 WAN SOUND 4 3 Ear phone Mouse D C R J

-

4 5 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 LAN 2.4G NB 5G NB Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connection Power cable RJ-45 cable USB cable Earphone cable RJ-45 cable RJ-45 cable*3 Shield Length No Yes No No No No 1.8M 1.4M 1.8M 1.1M 10M 1.5M Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 10 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Test Configuration: above 1GHz Report No.: FR292829AA AC Main 1 EUT 2 D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 U S B U S B x 2 Notebook Item 1 2 Connection Power cable RJ-45 cable Shield Length No No 1.8M 10M Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 11 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 3.9.2. AC Power Line Conduction Emissions Test Configuration AC MAIN Load Report No.: FR292829AA l F a s h D s k i l F a s h D s k i 5 6 1 EUT 2 D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 WAN SOUND 4 3 Ear phone Mouse D C R S 2 3 2 V G A L P T R J

-

4 5 R J

-

1 1 U S B x 2 LAN 2.4G NB 5G NB Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connection Power cable RJ-45 cable USB cable Earphone cable RJ-45 cable RJ-45 cable*3 Shield Length No Yes No No No No 1.8M 1.4M 1.8M 1.1M 10M 1.5M Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 12 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4. TEST RESULT Report No.: FR292829AA 4.1. AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Measurement 4.1.1. Limit For this product that is designed to connect to the AC power line, the radio frequency voltage that is conducted back onto the AC power line on any frequency or frequencies within the band 150 kHz to 30 MHz shall not exceed below limits table. Frequency (MHz) QP Limit (dBuV) AV Limit (dBuV) 0.15~0.5 0.5~5 5~30 66~56 56 60 56~46 46 50 4.1.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the receiver. Receiver Parameters Attenuation Start Frequency Stop Frequency IF Bandwidth Setting 10 dB 0.15 MHz 30 MHz 9 KHz 4.1.3. Test Procedures 1. Configure the EUT according to ANSI C63.10. The EUT or host of EUT has to be placed 0.4 meter far from the conducting wall of the shielding room and at least 80 centimeters from any other grounded conducting surface. 2. Connect EUT or host of EUT to the power mains through a line impedance stabilization network (LISN). 3. All the support units are connected to the other LISNs. The LISN should provide 50uH/50ohms coupling impedance. The frequency range from 150 KHz to 30 MHz was searched. 4. 5. Set the test-receiver system to Peak Detect Function and Specified Bandwidth with Maximum Hold Mode. The measurement has to be done between each power line and ground at the power terminal. 6. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 13 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.1.4. Test Setup Layout Report No.: FR292829AA LEGEND:

(1) Interconnecting cables that hang closer than 40 cm to the ground plane shall be folded back and forth in the center forming a bundle 30 to 40 cm long.

(2) I/O cables that are not connected to a peripheral shall be bundled in the center. The end of the cable may be terminated, if required, using the correct terminating impedance. The overall length shall not exceed 1 m.

(3) EUT connected to one LISN. Unused LISN measuring port connectors shall be terminated in 50 . LISN can be placed on top of, or immediately beneath, reference ground plane.

(3.1) All other equipment powered from additional LISN(s).

(3.2) Multiple outlet strip can be used for multiple power cords of non-EUT equipment.

(3.3) LISN at least 80 cm from nearest part of EUT chassis.

(4) Cables of hand-operated devices, such as keyboards, mice, etc., shall be placed as for normal use.

(5) Non-EUT components of EUT system being tested.

(6) Rear of EUT, including peripherals, shall all be aligned and flush with rear of tabletop.

(7) Rear of tabletop shall be 40 cm removed from a vertical conducting plane that is bonded to the ground plane. 4.1.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.1.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was placed on the test table and programmed in normal function. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 14 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.1.7. Results of AC Power Line Conducted Emissions Measurement Temperature Test Engineer 25 Sin Chang Configuration Normal Link / Mode 2 Humidity Phase 61%

Line Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 15 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Temperature Test Engineer 21.2 Sin Chang Configuration Normal Link / Mode 2 Humidity Phase 49.2%

Neutral Report No.: FR292829AA Note:

Level = Read Level + LISN Factor + Cable Loss. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 16 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.2. 99% Occupied Bandwidth Measurement 4.2.1. Limit No restriction limits. But resolution bandwidth within band edge measurement is 1% of the 99% occupied bandwidth. 4.2.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameters Setting Attenuation Auto Span Frequency

> 26dB Bandwidth RB VB Detector Trace Sweep Time 300 kHz 1000 kHz Peak Max Hold Auto 4.2.3. Test Procedures The transmitter output (antenna port) was connected to the spectrum analyzer in peak hold mode. The resolution bandwidth of 300 kHz and the video bandwidth of 1000 kHz were used. 1. 2. 3. Measured the spectrum width with power higher than 26dB below carrier. 4.2.4. Test Setup Layout 4.2.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.2.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 17 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.2.7. Test Result of 99% Occupied Bandwidth Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz 26dB Bandwidth

(MHz) 99% Occupied Bandwidth

(MHz) 22.72 25.60 25.28 17.76 17.76 17.76 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 26dB Bandwidth

(MHz) 99% Occupied Bandwidth

(MHz) 38 46 5190 MHz 5230 MHz 40.96 40.96 37.12 37.12 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 18 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz 26dB Bandwidth

(MHz) 99% Occupied Bandwidth

(MHz) 26.24 26.24 22.72 18.08 18.08 18.08 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 26dB Bandwidth

(MHz) 99% Occupied Bandwidth

(MHz) 38 46 5190 MHz 5230 MHz 39.04 39.04 36.48 36.48 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 19 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 26dB Bandwidth

(MHz) 99% Occupied Bandwidth

(MHz) 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz 20.16 20.00 20.00 16.96 16.96 16.96 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 20 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5180 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 300 kHz VBW 1 MHz SWT 20 ms D1 3.851 dBm T1 1 T2 1 D2 -22.149 dBm Delta 1 [T1 ]

-1.84 dB 22.720000000 MHz OBW 17.760000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-20.22 dBm 5.169760000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-6.48 dBm 5.171040000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-5.68 dBm 5.188800000 GHz A 3DB

-80 Center 5.18 GHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:28:57 F1 F2 8 MHz/

Span 80 MHz 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5200 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 300 kHz VBW 1 MHz SWT 20 ms D1 3.315 dBm T1 1 D2 -22.685 dBm T2 1 Delta 1 [T1 ]

0.03 dB 25.600000000 MHz OBW 17.760000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-22.66 dBm 5.187520000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-6.87 dBm 5.191040000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-3.87 dBm 5.208800000 GHz A 3DB 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.2 GHz F1 F2 8 MHz/

Span 80 MHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:28:33 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 21 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5240 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 300 kHz VBW 1 MHz SWT 20 ms 8 MHz/

Span 80 MHz 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5190 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 1 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWT 20 ms Delta 1 [T1 ]

0.48 dB 25.280000000 MHz OBW 17.760000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-23.35 dBm 5.227200000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-6.88 dBm 5.231040000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-4.28 dBm 5.248800000 GHz A 3DB Delta 1 [T1 ]

-0.40 dB 40.960000000 MHz OBW 37.120000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-22.54 dBm 5.169520000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-5.23 dBm 5.171440000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-6.08 dBm 5.208560000 GHz A 3DB T2 1 F2 T2 1 F2 D1 2.55 dBm T1 D2 -23.45 dBm 1 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.24 GHz F1 Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:28:04 D1 1.927 dBm T1 1 D2 -24.073 dBm 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.19 GHz F1 Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:29:36 16 MHz/

Span 160 MHz Page No. Issued Date

: 22 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5230 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 1 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWT 20 ms D1 5.874 dBm T1 1 D2 -20.126 dBm 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80 Center 5.23 GHz F1 Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:30:21 Delta 1 [T1 ]

-1.77 dB 40.960000000 MHz OBW 37.120000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-17.03 dBm 5.209520000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-1.78 dBm 5.211440000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-2.16 dBm 5.248560000 GHz A 3DB T2 1 F2 16 MHz/

Span 160 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 23 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5180 MHz 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5200 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 24 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5240 MHz 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5190 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 25 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5230 MHz 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5180 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 300 kHz VBW 1 MHz SWT 20 ms D1 2.098 dBm T1 1 T2 1 D2 -23.902 dBm Delta 1 [T1 ]

0.74 dB 20.160000000 MHz OBW 16.960000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-23.68 dBm 5.169760000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-10.78 dBm 5.171200000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-11.74 dBm 5.188160000 GHz A 3DB 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 F1 F2 8 MHz/

Span 80 MHz

-80 Center 5.18 GHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:14:04 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 26 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5200 MHz Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 300 kHz VBW 1 MHz SWT 20 ms D1 1.888 dBm T1 1 T2 1 D2 -24.112 dBm Delta 1 [T1 ]

0.54 dB 20.000000000 MHz OBW 16.960000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-23.75 dBm 5.189920000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-10.07 dBm 5.191200000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-12.71 dBm 5.208160000 GHz A 3DB 26 dB Bandwidth Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5240 MHz F1 F2 8 MHz/

Span 80 MHz

-80 Center 5.2 GHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:14:44 Ref 20 dBm 20

*

Att 30 dB

*

*

RBW 300 kHz VBW 1 MHz SWT 20 ms D1 1.385 dBm T1 1 T2 1 D2 -24.615 dBm Delta 1 [T1 ]

-0.46 dB 20.000000000 MHz OBW 16.960000000 MHz Marker 1 [T1 ]

-23.03 dBm 5.229920000 GHz Temp 1 [T1 OBW]

-10.06 dBm 5.231200000 GHz Temp 2 [T1 OBW]

-11.56 dBm 5.248160000 GHz A 3DB F1 F2 8 MHz/

Span 80 MHz

-80 Center 5.24 GHz Date: 1.OCT.2012 21:19:28 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 27 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 1 PK VIEW 10 0

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.3. Maximum Conducted Output Power Measurement 4.3.1. Limit For the band 5.15~5.25 GHz, the maximum conducted output power over the frequency band of operation shall not exceed the lesser of 50 mW (17dBm) or 4 dBm + 10log B, where B is the 26 dB emissions bandwidth in MHz. If transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both the maximum conducted output power and the peak power spectral density shall be reduced by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi. 4.3.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting The following table is the setting of the peak power meter. Power Meter Parameter Setting Bandwidth Detector 4.3.3. Test Procedures 50MHz bandwidth is greater than the EUT emission bandwidth AVERAGE Spectrum Parameter Setting RF Output Power Method ANSI C63.10 clause 6.10.2.1 (a) power meter method RF Output Power Method ANSI C63.10 clause 6.10.2.1 (b) channel integration method RF Output Power Method ANSI C63.10 clause 6.10.3.1 Method 1 - spectral trace averaging RF Output Power Method ANSI C63.10 clause 6.10.3.2 Method 2 - zero-span mode with trace averaging 4.3.4. Test Setup Layout 4.3.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.3.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 28 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.3.7. Test Result of Maximum Conducted Output Power Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 29, 2012 Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant.1+Ant.2+Ant.3 Channel Frequency Conducted Power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Output Power Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 36 40 48 5180 MHz 11.88 11.23 11.54 5200 MHz 11.92 11.09 11.64 5240 MHz 11.96 11.03 11.70 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant.1+Ant.2+Ant.3 Channel Frequency Conducted Power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 38 46 5190 MHz 10.93 10.24 11.13 5230 MHz 12.44 11.40 12.63 17.00 17.00 17.00 Complies Complies Complies

(dBm) 16.33 16.33 16.35 Total Conducted Output Power Max. Limit

(dBm) Result

(dBm) 15.55 16.96 17.00 17.00 Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 29 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 29, 2012 Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant.1+Ant.2+Ant.3 Channel Frequency Conducted Power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 Total Conducted Output Power Max. Limit

(dBm) Result 36 40 48 5180 MHz 11.92 11.27 13.19 5200 MHz 12.01 11.05 13.09 5240 MHz 12.11 11.01 12.59 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant.1+Ant.2+Ant.3 Channel Frequency Conducted Power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 38 46 5190 MHz 11.63 11.27 13.11 5230 MHz 11.48 11.13 13.14 17.00 17.00 17.00 Complies Complies Complies

(dBm) 16.97 16.90 16.72 Total Conducted Output Power Max. Limit

(dBm) Result

(dBm) 16.85 16.78 17.00 17.00 Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 30 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 29, 2012 Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant.1+Ant.2+Ant.3 Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a Channel Frequency Conducted Power (dBm) Ant. 1 Ant. 2 Ant. 3 36 40 48 5180 MHz 11.14 10.73 11.26 5200 MHz 11.39 10.73 11.48 5240 MHz 12.02 11.18 11.63 Total Conducted Output Power Max. Limit

(dBm) Result

(dBm) 15.82 15.98 16.39 17.00 17.00 17.00 Complies Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 31 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.4. Power Spectral Density Measurement 4.4.1. Limit The power spectral density is defined as the highest level of power in dBm per MHz generated by the transmitter within the power envelope. The following table is power spectral density limits and decrease power density limit rule refer to section 4.3.1. Frequency Range 5.15~5.25 GHz Power Spectral Density limit (dBm/MHz) 4 4.4.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Span Frequency RB VB Detector Trace Sweep Time Trace Average Setting Auto Encompass the entire emissions bandwidth (EBW) of the signal 1000 kHz 3000 kHz RMS AVERAGE Auto 100 times 4.4.3. Test Procedures The test procedure is the same as section 4.6.3. Trace A, Set RBW =1MHz, VBW = 3MHz, Span >26dB bandwidth, Max. hold. 1. 2. 3. Delta Mark trace A Maximum frequency and trace B same frequency. 4. Repeat the above procedure until measurements for all frequencies were complete. 5. Procedures refer KDB 662911 : Measure and sum the spectra across the outputs. The first spectral bin of output 1 is summed with that in the first spectral bin of output 2 and that from the first spectral bin of output 3, and so on up to the Nth output to obtain the value for the first frequency bin of the summed spectrum. The summed spectrum value for each of the other frequency bins is computed in the same way.This will likely require transferring the measured spectra to a computer, where the bin-by-bin summing can be performed 4.4.4. Test Setup Layout This test setup layout is the same as that shown in section 4.6.4. 4.4.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.4.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 32 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.4.7. Test Result of Power Spectral Density Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 22, 2012 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Report No.: FR292829AA Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Channel Frequency Total Power Density

(dBm/MHz) Max. Limit (dBm/MHz) Result 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz 3.13 3.10 3.10 3.33 3.33 3.33 Complies Complies Complies Note: =6.67dBi > 6dBi , so the band1 power density limit =4-(6.67dBi-6)=3.33dBm Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Channel Frequency Total Power Density

(dBm/MHz) Max. Limit (dBm/MHz) Result 38 46 5190 MHz 5230 MHz 1.13 3.10 3.33 3.33 Complies Complies Note: =6. 67dBi > 6dBi , so the band1 power density limit =4-(6.67dBi-6)=3.33dBm Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 33 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 22, 2012 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Channel Frequency Total Power Density

(dBm/MHz) Max. Limit

(dBm/MHz) 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz 2.37 2.44 2.55 4.00 4.00 4.00 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz Channel Frequency Total Power Density

(dBm/MHz) Max. Limit

(dBm/MHz) 38 46 5190 MHz 5230 MHz 0.57 0.87 4.00 4.00 Result Complies Complies Complies Result Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 34 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer Test Date 25 Denis Su Oct. 22, 2012 Configuration IEEE 802.11a Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a Channel Frequency Total Power Density

(dBm/MHz) Max. Limit

(dBm/MHz) 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz 3.24 3.16 3.22 3.33 3.33 3.33 Result Complies Complies Complies Note: =6.67dBi > 6dBi , so the band1 power density limit =4-(6.67dBi-6)=3.33dBm Note: All the test values were listed in the report. For plots, only the channel with maximum results was shown. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 35 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1+Ant. 2+Ant. 3 / 5180 MHz Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1+Ant. 2+Ant. 3 / 5230 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 36 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1+Ant. 2+Ant. 3 / 5240 MHz Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant. 1+Ant. 2+Ant. 3 / 5230 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 37 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Power Density Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1+Ant. 2+Ant. 3 / 5180 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 38 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.5. Peak Excursion Measurement 4.5.1. Limit Report No.: FR292829AA The ratio of the peak excursion of the modulation envelope (measured using a peak hold function) to the maximum conducted output power (measured as specified above) shall not exceed 13 dB across any 1 MHz bandwidth or the emissions bandwidth whichever is less. 4.5.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Setting Attenuation Auto Span Frequency Encompass the entire emissions bandwidth (EBW) of the signal RB VB Detector Trace Sweep Time 4.5.3. Test Procedures 1000 kHz (Peak Trace) / 1000 kHz (Average Trace) 3000 kHz (Peak Trace) / 3000 kHz (Average Trace) Peak (Peak Trace) / RMS (Average Trace) Max Hold AUTO The test procedure is the same as section 4.6.3. Trace A, Set RBW =1MHz, VBW = 3MHz, Span >26dB bandwidth, Max. hold. 1. 2. 3. Delta Mark trace A Maximum frequency and trace B same frequency. 4. Repeat the above procedure until measurements for all frequencies were complete. 4.5.4. Test Setup Layout This test setup layout is the same as that shown in section 4.6.4. 4.5.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.5.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 39 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.5.7. Test Result of Peak Excursion Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz Peak Excursion Max. Limit

(dB) 8.57 9.51 9.52

(dB) 13 13 13 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 38 46 5190 MHz 5230 MHz Peak Excursion Max. Limit

(dB) 9.56 10.65

(dB) 13 13 Result Complies Complies Complies Result Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 40 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11n Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz Peak Excursion Max. Limit

(dB) 10.39 10.65 10.38

(dB) 13 13 13 Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 38 46 5190 MHz 5230 MHz Peak Excursion Max. Limit

(dB) 9.98 10.37

(dB) 13 13 Result Complies Complies Complies Result Complies Complies Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 41 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature Test Engineer 25 Denis Su Humidity 56%

Configurations IEEE 802.11a Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Channel Frequency 36 40 48 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 5240 MHz Peak Excursion Max. Limit

(dB) 8.90 9.41 9.21

(dB) 13 13 13 Result Complies Complies Complies Note: All the test values were listed in the report. For plots, only the channel with maximum results was shown. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 42 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Peak Excursion Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5200MHz Peak Excursion Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5230 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 43 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Peak Excursion Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5200 MHz Peak Excursion Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5230 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 44 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Peak Excursion Plot on Configuration IEEE 802.11a / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 / 5200 MHz Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 45 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.6. Radiated Emissions Measurement 4.6.1. Limit Report No.: FR292829AA For transmitters operating in the 5.15-5.35 GHz band: all emissions outside of the 5.15-5.35 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of -27 dBm/MHz (68.3dBuV/m at 3m). For transmitters operating in the In addition, In case the emission fall within the restricted band specified on 15.205(a), then the 15.209(a) limit in the table below has to be followed. Frequencies

(MHz) 0.009~0.490 0.490~1.705 1.705~30.0 30~88 88~216 216~960 Above 960 Field Strength

(micorvolts/meter) 2400/F(KHz) 24000/F(KHz) 30 100 150 200 500 Measurement Distance

(meters) 300 30 30 3 3 3 3 4.6.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of spectrum analyzer and receiver. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Start Frequency Stop Frequency Setting Auto 1000 MHz 40 GHz RB / VB (Emission in restricted band) 1MHz / 3MHz for Peak, 1 MHz / 10Hz for Average RB / VB (Emission in non-restricted band) 1MHz / 3MHz for peak Receiver Parameter Attenuation Start ~ Stop Frequency Start ~ Stop Frequency Start ~ Stop Frequency Setting Auto 9kHz~150kHz / RB 200Hz for QP 150kHz~30MHz / RB 9kHz for QP 30MHz~1000MHz / RB 120kHz for QP Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 46 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.6.3. Test Procedures Report No.: FR292829AA 1. Configure the EUT according to ANSI C63.10. The EUT was placed on the top of the turntable 0.8 meter above ground. The phase center of the receiving antenna mounted on the top of a height-variable antenna tower was placed 3 meters far away from the turntable. 2. Power on the EUT and all the supporting units. The turntable was rotated by 360 degrees to determine 3. the position of the highest radiation. The height of the broadband receiving antenna was varied between one meter and four meters above ground to find the maximum emissions field strength of both horizontal and vertical polarization. 4. For each suspected emissions, the antenna tower was scan (from 1 M to 4 M) and then the turntable was rotated (from 0 degree to 360 degrees) to find the maximum reading. 5. Set the test-receiver system to Peak or CISPR quasi-peak Detect Function with specified bandwidth under Maximum Hold Mode. 6. For emissions above 1GHz, use 1MHz VBW and RBW for peak reading. Then 1MHz RBW and 10Hz VBW for average reading in spectrum analyzer. 7. When the radiated emissions limits are expressed in terms of the average value of the emissions, and pulsed operation is employed, the measurement field strength shall be determined by averaging over one complete pulse train, including blanking intervals, as long as the pulse train does not exceed 0.1 seconds. As an alternative (provided the transmitter operates for longer than 0.1 seconds) or in cases where the pulse train exceeds 0.1 seconds, the measured field strength shall be determined from the average absolute voltage during a 0.1 second interval during which the field strength is at its maximum value. If the emissions level of the EUT in peak mode was 3 dB lower than the average limit specified, then testing will be stopped and peak values of EUT will be reported, otherwise, the emissions which do not have 3 dB margin will be repeated one by one using the quasi-peak method for below 1GHz. 8. 9. For testing above 1GHz, the emissions level of the EUT in peak mode was lower than average limit (that means the emissions level in peak mode also complies with the limit in average mode), then testing will be stopped and peak values of EUT will be reported, otherwise, the emissions will be measured in average mode again and reported. 10. In case the emission is lower than 30MHz, loop antenna has to be used for measurement and the recorded data should be QP measured by receiver. High Low scan is not required in this case. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 47 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.6.4. Test Setup Layout For radiated emissions below 1GHz Report No.: FR292829AA For radiated emissions above 1GHz 4.6.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.6.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 48 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.6.7. Results of Radiated Emissions (9kHz~30MHz) Temperature Test Engineer 26 Magic Lai Test Date Oct. 08, 2012 Humidity 60%

Configurations Normal Link Freq.

(MHz)

-

Level

(dBuV)

-

Over Limit

(dB)

-

Limit Line

(dBuV)

-

Remark See Note Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Distance extrapolation factor = 40 log (specific distance / test distance) (dB);

Limit line = specific limits (dBuV) + distance extrapolation factor. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 49 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.6.8. Results of Radiated Emissions (30MHz~1GHz) Temperature Test Engineer Horizontal 26 Magic Lai Humidity 60%

Configurations Normal Link / Mode 2 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 50 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Vertical Report No.: FR292829AA Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 51 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.6.9. Results for Radiated Emissions (1GHz~40GHz) Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 36

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 52 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 40

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 53 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 48

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 54 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 38

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 55 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 46

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 56 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz Ch 36

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 57 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz Ch 40

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 58 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz Ch 48

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 59 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz Ch 38

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 60 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz Ch 46

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 61 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a Ch 36 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 62 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a Ch 40 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 63 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a Ch 48 / Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 +

Ant. 3 Test Date Horizontal Oct. 05, 2012 Vertical Note:

The amplitude of spurious emissions that are attenuated by more than 20dB below the permissible value has no need to be reported. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 64 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.7. Band Edge Emissions Measurement 4.7.1. Limit For transmitters operating in the 5.15-5.35 GHz band: all emissions outside of the 5.15-5.35 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of -27 dBm/MHz (68.3dBuV/m at 3m). In addition, In case the emission fall within the restricted band specified on 15.205(a), then the 15.209(a) limit in the table below has to be followed. Frequencies

(MHz) 0.009~0.490 0.490~1.705 1.705~30.0 30~88 88~216 216~960 Above 960 Field Strength

(micorvolts/meter) 2400/F(KHz) 24000/F(KHz) 30 100 150 200 500 Measurement Distance

(meters) 300 30 30 3 3 3 3 4.7.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Span Frequency Setting Auto 100 MHz RB / VB (Emission in restricted band) 1MHz / 3MHz for Peak, 1 MHz / 10Hz for Average RB / VB (Emission in non-restricted band) 1 MHz / 3MHz for Peak 4.7.3. Test Procedures 11. The test procedure is the same as section 4.6.3, only the frequency range investigated is limited to 100MHz around bandedges. 12. In case the emission is fail due to the used RB/VB is too wide, marker-delta method of FCC Public Notice DA00-705 will be followed. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 65 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.7.4. Test Setup Layout This test setup layout is the same as that shown in section 4.6.4. 4.7.5. Test Deviation There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.7.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously transmitting mode. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 66 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA 4.7.7. Test Result of Band Edge and Fundamental Emissions Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 20MHz Ch 36, 40, 48

/Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Oct. 05, 2012 Channel 36 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5180 MHz. Channel 40 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5200 MHz. Channel 48 Item 3,4 are the fundamental frequency at 5240 MHz. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 67 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS0 40MHz Ch 38, 46

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Oct. 05, 2012 Channel 38 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5190 MHz. Channel 46 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5230 MHz. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 68 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 20MHz Ch 36, 40, 48

/Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Oct. 05, 2012 Channel 36 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5180 MHz. Channel 40 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5200 MHz. Channel 48 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5240 MHz. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 69 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11n MCS8 40MHz Ch 38, 46

/ Ant. 1 + Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Oct. 05, 2012 Channel 38 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5190 MHz. Channel 46 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5230 MHz. Note:

Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m) Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level The limits above 5GHz shall be extrapolated to the specified distance using an extrapolation factor of 20 dB/decade from 3m to 1.5m. Distance extrapolation factor = 20 log (specific distance [3m] / test distance [1.5m]) (dB);

Limit line = specific limits (dBuV) + distance extrapolation factor [6 dB]. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 70 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Temperature 25.6 Humidity 56%

Test Engineer Magic Lai Configurations IEEE 802.11a Ch 36, 40, 48 / Ant. 1

+ Ant. 2 + Ant. 3 Test Date Channel 36 Oct. 05, 2012 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5180 MHz. Channel 40 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5200 MHz. Channel 48 Item 3, 4 are the fundamental frequency at 5240 MHz. Note:

Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m) Corrected Reading: Antenna Factor + Cable Loss + Read Level - Preamp Factor = Level Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 71 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.8. Frequency Stability Measurement 4.8.1. Limit Report No.: FR292829AA Manufacturers of U-NII devices are responsible for ensuring frequency stability such that an emissions is maintained within the band of operation under all conditions of normal operation as specified in the users manual or 20ppm (IEEE 802.11nspecification). 4.8.2. Measuring Instruments and Setting Please refer to section 5 of equipments list in this report. The following table is the setting of the spectrum analyzer. Spectrum Parameter Attenuation Span Frequency RB VB Sweep Time 4.8.3. Test Procedures Setting Auto Entire absence of modulation emissions bandwidth 10 kHz 10 kHz Auto The transmitter output (antenna port) was connected to the spectrum analyzer. 1. 2. EUT have transmitted absence of modulation signal and fixed channelize. 3. Set the spectrum analyzer span to view the entire absence of modulation emissions bandwidth. 4. Set RBW = 10 kHz, VBW = 10 kHz with peak detector and maxhold settings. 5. fc is declaring of channel frequency. Then the frequency error formula is (fc-f)/fc 106 ppm and the limit is less than 20ppm (IEEE 802.11nspecification). The test extreme voltage is to change the primary supply voltage from 85 to 115 percent of the nominal value 6. 7. Extreme temperature rule is -30C~50C. 4.8.4. Test Setup Layout Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 72 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.8.5. Test Deviation Report No.: FR292829AA There is no deviation with the original standard. 4.8.6. EUT Operation during Test The EUT was programmed to be in continuously un-modulation transmitting mode. 4.8.7. Test Result of Frequency Stability Voltage vs. Frequency Stability Voltage

(V) 126.5 110 93.5 Max. Deviation (MHz) Max. Deviation (ppm) Temperature vs. Frequency Stability Measurement Frequency (MHz) 5200 5199.9976 5199.9975 5200.0030 0.003000 0.58 Temperature Measurement Frequency (MHz)

()

-30

-20

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 Max. Deviation (MHz) Max. Deviation (ppm) 5200 5200.0004 5200.0005 5200.0006 5200.0005 5199.9887 5199.9986 5199.9984 5199.9986 5199.9984 0.011300 2.17 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 73 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 4.9. Antenna Requirements 4.9.1. Limit Report No.: FR292829AA Except for special regulations, the Low-power Radio-frequency Devices must not be equipped with any jacket for installing an antenna with extension cable. An intentional radiator shall be designed to ensure that no antenna other than that furnished by the responsible party shall be used with the device. The use of a permanently attached antenna or of an antenna that uses a unique coupling to the intentional radiator shall be considered sufficient to comply with the provisions of this Section. The manufacturer may design the unit so that the user can replace a broken antenna, but the use of a standard antenna jack or electrical connector is prohibited. Further, this requirement does not apply to intentional radiators that must be professionally installed. 4.9.2. Antenna Connector Construction Please refer to section 3.3 in this test report; antenna connector complied with the requirements. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 74 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 5. LIST OF MEASURING EQUIPMENTS Report No.: FR292829AA Instrument Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Characteristics Calibration Date EMI Test Receiver R&S ESCS 30 100377 9kHz ~ 2.75GHz Sep. 14, 2012 LISN F.C.C. FCC-LISN-50-16-2 04083 150kHz ~ 100MHz Nov. 14, 2011 V- LISN Schwarzbeck NSLK 8127 8127-478 9K ~ 30MHz Nov. 30, 2011 PULSE LIMITER R&S ESH3-Z2 100430 9K~30MHz Feb. 03, 2012 COND Cable Woken Cable 01 0.15MHz~30MHz Dec. 04, 2011 BILOG ANTENNA Schaffner CBL6112D 22021 20MHz ~ 2GHz Jan. 11, 2012 Horn Antenna EMCO 3115 00075790 750MHz~18GHz Nov. 25, 2011 Horn Antenna SCHWARZBEAK BBHA 9170 BBHA9170252 15GHz ~ 40GHz Nov. 22, 2011 Pre-Amplifier Agilent 8449B 3008A02310 1GHz ~ 26.5GHz Nov. 29, 2011 Spectrum analyzer EMI Test Receiver R&S R&S FSP40 100056 9KHz~40GHz Nov. 03, 2011 ESCS 30 100355 9KHz ~ 2.75GHz Mar. 20, 2012 Loop Antenna Teseq HLA 6120 24155 9 kHz - 30 MHz Sep. 09, 2012 Turn Table Antenna Mast INN CO INN CO CO 2000 CO2000 RF Cable-low Woken Low Cable-1 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-1 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-2 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-3 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 360 degree 1 m - 4 m N/A N/A 30 MHz - 1 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz - 40 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz - 40 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 Signal analyzer R&S FSV40 100979 9KHz~40GHz Sep. 26, 2012 Temp. and Humidity Chamber Thermo-Hygro Meter RF Power Divider N/A HP Ten Billion TTH-D3SP TBN-931011

-30~100 degree May 20, 2012 HC 520

#1 15~70 degree Nov. 02, 2011 11636A 00306 2GHz ~ 18GHz RF Power Splitter Anaren RF Power Splitter Anaren 44100 42100 1839 2GHz ~ 18GHz 17930 2GHz ~ 18GHz N/A N/A N/A Remark Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Conduction

(CO01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Radiation

(03CH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 75 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 Report No.: FR292829AA Instrument Manufacturer Model No. RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-7 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-8 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-9 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-10 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-11 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-12 RF Cable-high Woken High Cable-13 Serial No. Characteristics Calibration Date

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 1 GHz 26.5 GHz Nov. 17, 2011 Power Sensor Anritsu MA2411B 0917223 300MHz~40GHz Nov. 01, 2011 Power Meter Anritsu ML2495A 1035008 300MHz~40GHz Nov. 01, 2011 Remark Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Conducted

(TH01-CB) Note: Calibration Interval of instruments listed above is one year.

* Calibration Interval of instruments listed above is two years. NCR means Non-Calibration required. Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 76 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 6. TEST LOCATION Report No.: FR292829AA SHIJR ADD

: 6Fl., No. 106, Sec. 1, Shintai 5th Rd., Shijr City, Taipei, Taiwan 221, R.O.C. TEL FAX

: 886-2-2696-2468

: 886-2-2696-2255 HWA YA ADD

: No. 52, Hwa Ya 1st Rd., Kwei-Shan Hsiang, Tao Yuan Hsien, Taiwan, R.O.C. LINKOU TEL FAX ADD TEL FAX

: 886-3-327-3456

: 886-3-318-0055

: No. 30-2, Dingfu Tsuen, Linkou Shiang, Taipei, Taiwan 244, R.O.C

: 886-2-2601-1640

: 886-2-2601-1695 DUNGHU ADD

: No. 3, Lane 238, Kangle St., Neihu Chiu, Taipei, Taiwan 114, R.O.C. JUNGHE NEIHU JHUBEI TEL FAX ADD TEL FAX ADD TEL FAX ADD TEL FAX

: 886-2-2631-4739

: 886-2-2631-9740

: 7Fl., No. 758, Jungjeng Rd., Junghe City, Taipei, Taiwan 235, R.O.C.

: 886-2-8227-2020

: 886-2-8227-2626

: 4Fl., No. 339, Hsin Hu 2nd Rd., Taipei 114, Taiwan, R.O.C.

: 886-2-2794-8886

: 886-2-2794-9777

: No.8, Lane 724, Bo-ai St., Jhubei City, HsinChu County 302, Taiwan, R.O.C.

: 886-3-656-9065

: 886-3-656-9085 Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 77 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012 7. TAF CERTIFICATE OF ACCREDITATION Report No.: FR292829AA Report Format Version: 01 FCC ID: PY312300207 Page No. Issued Date

: 78 of 78

: Oct. 31, 2012